JP7533686B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet on and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-044062 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the display on the display means needs to be performed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows the display means to display appropriately.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a display device having a display unit,
A display storage means for storing image data in advance;
a display control means for setting drawing data in a setting storage area using the image data, and displaying an image on the display unit based on an image signal corresponding to the drawing data outputted to the display means;
Equipped with
The display control means
a predetermined drawing execution means for setting predetermined drawing data that enables a predetermined corresponding image to be displayed in a first setting area in the setting storage area that corresponds to a first display area on the display unit, and in a second setting area in the setting storage area that corresponds to a second display area on the display unit ;
a different correspondence setting means for setting, in the setting storage area, different drawing data that enables a different image to be displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area in addition to displaying the predetermined corresponding image in each of the first display area and the second display area;
Equipped with
the predetermined drawing execution means includes means for creating the predetermined drawing data in a predetermined setting area in the setting storage area, the predetermined setting area being an area not corresponding to a display area of the display unit, and copying the predetermined drawing data created in the predetermined setting area to each of the first setting area and the second setting area;
The other correspondence setting means is characterized in that after the specified drawing execution means copies the specified drawing data to each of the first setting area and the second setting area, the other drawing data is set in the setting memory area .

The present invention makes it possible to ensure that the display on the display means is optimal.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the patterns visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits provided. 1A is a front view of a common display area, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on the common display section. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device and the display content of the stop order in the multi-purpose display unit. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the role selection process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when three coins are bet. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when two coins are bet. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing executed by the main MPU when a game ends. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game zones existing in a slot machine. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing for advantageous states at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the AT state processing executed by the main MPU at the start of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. A flowchart showing the performance control processing for AT executed by the performance side MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display presentation corresponding to the base presentation of the AT state in an image display device; (b) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display presentation corresponding to a false premonition state or a real premonition state in an image display device; and (c) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display presentation corresponding to the end of the AT state in an image display device. (a) to (f) are time charts showing the progression of effects corresponding to premonition states. An explanatory diagram for explaining the combinations of patterns that result in a normal replay winning, a first special replay winning, and a second special replay winning in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when three coins are bet. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification is made on the main line to encourage the achievement of a first special replay winning, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification is made on the main line to encourage the achievement of a second special replay winning. 11 is a flowchart showing a stop order notification control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification control process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process executed by the main MPU. (a) to (k) are time charts showing the operation contents when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved in each game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning determination process executed by the main MPU in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the AT state processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a top-up period executed by the main MPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when an additional lottery process for the add-on period is executed by referring to a lottery table for the first add-on period, and the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when an additional lottery process for the add-on period is executed by referring to a lottery table for the second add-on period. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the performance executed on the image display device during the first added-on period. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the performance executed on the image display device during the second added-on period. FIG. 11 is an electrical configuration diagram for enabling image display during a first added period and a second added period. A flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the performance setting process for the added period executed by the performance side MPU. A flowchart showing the display control processing for the added period executed by the production side MPU. 11 is a flowchart showing a divided image drawing process executed by the VDP. 13A to 13D are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data is created in a frame area of a frame buffer that is the drawing target by executing drawing processing for a divided image. 13 is a flowchart showing a divided image drawing process executed by a VDP according to the fifth embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed into a box shape that is open at the front as a whole by fixing multiple wooden panels.

As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 around an axis 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a pivot axis so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side of the front door, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a specified key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The axes of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of game media (or game value), which are either medals or virtual medals, have been bet, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate simultaneously.

On the right side of the start lever 41, there are stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is located directly below the display window 21L, 21M, 21R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes capable of stopping the left reel 32L when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel started spinning.

One game (play) is the period from when the start lever 41 is operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, when the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop to when the various processes, such as the awarding of game media and management of the game status, are completed.

A medal insertion port 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display window parts 21L, 21M, and 21R. The medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45 are guided to a hopper device 53 by a selector 52 provided on the back side of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided on the lower front side of the front door 12 when reception is prohibited (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of discharging medals stored in a storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning event corresponding to the award of game media is established on the main line ML described later. Below the medal insertion port 45, a return button 46 is provided, which is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 gets stuck in the selector 52, as shown in FIG. 1.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there are provided a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting two virtual medals at one time. In this slot machine 10, there are two situations in which the number of gaming media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (i.e., bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by three virtual medals and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by two virtual medals and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by one virtual medal and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by two virtual medals and becomes "2". When the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, if the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, one virtual medal will be deducted and the number of bets will become "2".

If the first credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the available number of bets and the current number of bets, the number of bets increases by the number of virtual medals, and the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets will be "2" instead of two virtual medals being reduced. In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets will be "2" instead of one virtual medal being reduced. In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets will be "2" instead of two virtual medals being reduced. In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets will be "2" instead of one virtual medal being reduced.

If the second credit insertion button 48 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current number of bets is "0," the number of bets becomes "1" and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a larger pressing surface that is pressed when the player operates the button than the second credit insertion button 48. This improves the operability of the first credit insertion button 47.

A settlement button 51 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. This slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and any medals paid out when a prize is won. When the settlement button 51 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 58 as real medals.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, inside the cabinet 11, a power supply unit 54 is provided to the left of the hopper unit 53. The power supply unit 54 is provided with a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key held by the amusement hall manager is inserted and operated to change the setting value of the slot machine 10 within the range of "1" to "6."

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 4 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from "0" to "20" are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers that the main control device 70, which will be described later, uses to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are seven types of symbols: "Bell" symbol (e.g., 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), and "White 7" symbol (e.g., 5th on left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of the various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 5 is a front view of the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is all stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the middle symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. When a predetermined number or more of gaming media have been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, and if a winning combination corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, one of the following benefits is awarded: the provision of gaming media, the provision of a replay, or a transition to a new gaming state.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line that can result in a win. The main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a combination of symbols that can result in a win is formed on a line that extends in a straight line, such as the subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL2 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL3 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the subline SL4 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, no win is formed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won, with reference to Figure 6. Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won.

The minor prizes that result in the awarding of gaming media include the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, the seventh compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, the ninth compensation prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. In detail, when the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, it is the first compensation prize. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a second supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a fourth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a fifth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a sixth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern on the main line ML, a seventh supplementary win will be made. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then an 8th supplementary win is awarded. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then a 9th supplementary win is awarded. If any of the 1st to 9th supplementary wins are awarded, the number of game media to be awarded will be "1".

When the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, the first bell win is achieved. When the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, the second bell win is achieved. When either the first bell win or the second bell win is achieved, the number of gaming media to be awarded becomes "15".

If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" pattern, the first watermelon win is obtained. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, the second watermelon win is obtained. If either the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is obtained, the number of game media to be awarded is "5". If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" pattern, a cherry win is obtained regardless of the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If a cherry wins, the number of gaming media awarded will be "2".

Winnings that grant a replay privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without betting gaming media, include the normal replay winning, the first chance replay winning, and the second chance replay winning. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, then If the stopping pattern is a "red 7" and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay", if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay", the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR", or if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon", the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell", a normal replay is won. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay", the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry", and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell", a first chance replay is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L along the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, a second chance replay win will occur.

If any of the above replay wins are won, a replay bonus will be awarded, which allows you to play the next game without having to bet on a gaming medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins are won in a game where you have bet on gaming medium "3", you will be able to start playing the next game with gaming medium "3" betted, without having to bet on a gaming medium. Also, if any of the replay wins are won in a game where you have bet on gaming medium "2", you will be able to start playing the next game with gaming medium "2" betted, without having to bet on a gaming medium.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the first CB winning and the second CB winning. In detail, when the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the center reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern, a first CB winning occurs. When the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the center reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, a second CB winning occurs. When the first CB winning occurs, the game state transitions to the first CB state ST2, and when the second CB winning occurs, the game state transitions to the second CB state ST3 (see FIG. 19).

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a minor winning combination stops on the main line ML, a winning combination is established and medals are paid out regardless of whether or not a winning combination is achieved. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning combination is not set to "1," gaming media is awarded to the player when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning combination stops on the main line ML. On the other hand, a replay winning combination is established on the condition that the corresponding combination has been won in a lottery.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control that allows the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In other words, in the non-CB state, reel control that stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. On the other hand, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the above reel control is performed for the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the above reel control is not performed for the left reel 32L. For the left reel 32L, reel control that allows the reel to slide up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated is performed. In other words, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control is performed on the left reel 32L to stop it within a specified time (75 msec) that is shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control that only allows a maximum of one symbol to slide is not limited to the left reel 32L, but may be performed on the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button only for a maximum of one symbol, or may be performed on a predetermined reel only for a maximum of one symbol. Furthermore, reel control that only allows a maximum of one symbol to slide on the reel corresponding to the stop button operated in a certain order may be performed, such as reel control that only allows a maximum of one symbol to slide on the reel corresponding to the second or last operated stop button.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, if a combination corresponding to a replay win is won, the replay win takes priority, and if a replay win is not possible, the first bell win may occur. Also, the first bell win may occur even if a combination corresponding to a replay win is not won.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are both game states that do not increase the number of game media owned by the player. Furthermore, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are both game states that reduce the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state compared to the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state.

Next, we will explain the devices used to make various announcements and perform various effects.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is also provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the speakers 62 are controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 63 is also controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. In other words, the image display device 63 executes a display performance.

The gaming panel 20 of the front door 12 is provided with a credit display section 65 below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, which displays the number of virtual medals stored, a dual-purpose display section 66 which displays the number of gaming media to be awarded when a small winning combination is won, and also displays information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when notified by the image display device 63, and further displays information to notify the results of the management of the gaming history, and a section display section 67 which displays information indicating that the gaming section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is made up of a seven-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED such as green.

Figure 7(a) is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a combined display unit 66 and a section display unit 67 are provided. In the common display area 68, as shown in Figure 7(a), a combined display unit 66 in which two seven-segment displays 66a, 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and a section display unit 67 consisting of one light-emitting element are integrated.

When any of the small prize winnings (1st to 9th compensation winnings, 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning, or cherry winning) corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the small prize winning is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the game in which the small prize winning is achieved. Specifically, when any of the 1st to 9th compensation winnings is achieved in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "1", thereby notifying that "1" game media has been awarded. When any of the 1st bell winning and the 2nd bell winning are achieved in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a displays "1" and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "15" game media have been awarded. In addition, when either the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning occurs in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a becomes non-displayable and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "5" gaming media have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry winning occurs in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a becomes non-displayable and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "2", thereby notifying that "2" gaming media have been awarded.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media awarded in response to a small win is "1". Therefore, when a small win is achieved in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "1", thereby indicating that "1" game media has been awarded.

On the other hand, even if a winning event that does not award gaming media, such as any of the replay winnings or any of the CB winnings, occurs, no display corresponding to that winning event is made on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and in this case the seven-segment displays 66a, 66b remain in a hidden state. The display of the number of awarded gaming media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 ends when gaming media is bet on to start the game following the game for which the display was made, and at the time this bet is made the seven-segment displays 66a, 66b go into a hidden state.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R notified on the image display device 63 includes a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. There are stopping sequences where the second stop is on the right reel 32R and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, where the first stop is on the left reel 32L and the rest is optional, where the first stop is on the center reel 32M and the rest is optional, and where the first stop is on the right reel 32R and the rest is optional.

The notification of the stop order on the image display device 63 may be executed when a role that includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth compensation winning data is won in the lottery process of the role in the non-CB state, or when a role that includes the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data is won. Specifically, when a role that includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth compensation winning data is won, the first bell winning is established if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role among the above stopping orders, and any of the first to sixth compensation winnings may be established if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role. When the first bell winning is established, the game medium "15" is awarded to the player as already explained, and when any of the first to sixth compensation winnings is established, the game medium "1" is awarded to the player as already explained.

When a player wins a combination that includes the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data, the second bell win occurs if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination, and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation wins may occur if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not stop in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination. If the second bell win occurs, the player is awarded "15" gaming media as explained above, and if any of the seventh to ninth compensation wins occurs, the player is awarded "1" gaming media as explained above.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b displays the stop order of the order to be notified. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display content of the stop order of the combined display unit 66 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification content of the stop order of the image display device 63. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which multiple types of display content of the combined display unit 66 are set in correspondence with some or all of the notification content of the stop order of the image display device 63 may be used.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content that is the subject of display when a display corresponding to the awarding of game media is made on the combined display unit 66. This makes it easier to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figures 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66.

When the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced on image display device 63, as shown in Fig. 8(a), the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stopping operations required to end the game are displayed on image display device 63, and an image corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows the stop order being notified when the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, so the left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 displays an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R.

In the image display device 63, an image is displayed that notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8(b), an "L" corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. In other words, in the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and an image corresponding to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed in each unit display image G1 to G3, whereas in the combined display unit 66, a display unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than that of the image display unit 63. This also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display unit 63. The combined display unit 66 is also located on the opposite side to the image display unit 63, across the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be viewed. This means that the combined display unit 66 is positioned away from the image display unit 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63 are started after the lottery process for the winning combination is performed and before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63, but these displays may be configured to start simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and image display device 63 ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed.

The dual-purpose display unit 66 is disposed in the center of the common display area 68, whereas the section display unit 67 is disposed in a corner of the common display area 68. The section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is the second section SC2 of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 (see FIG. 19). The second section SC2 is a section in which a favorable game state (specifically, a pseudo bonus state ST4 and an AT state ST5) in which the expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") can exceed "0" can be started by notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to win advantageously when the winnings to be established are different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the advantageous game state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section SC1 is a section in which the advantageous game state does not start and does not continue.

The section display unit 67 is turned on when the player is in a favorable gaming state in which the expected value of the game medium to be acquired exceeds "0" by being notified of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows the player to win a winning combination that is advantageous to the player when the player wins a winning combination that is advantageous to the player depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or when the player wins a winning combination that is advantageous to the player depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 correspond to the above-mentioned favorable gaming state, while the second section SC2, which is neither the pseudo bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, does not correspond to the above-mentioned favorable gaming state. Therefore, when moving from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. If the section display unit 67 remains off when moving to the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 will change from an off state to an on state when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5 starts in the second section SC2. If the section display unit 67 becomes on, it will remain on until the second section SC2 ends, and will become off when the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 begins.

As described above, in a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is turned on once in the second section SC2 and the turned on state is maintained until the end of the second section SC2, the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is provided in a concentrated manner in the common display area 68, is turned on when a game medium is awarded and turned off when the next game starts, and is turned on when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display device 63 and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too noticeable to the player, it is possible to actively create a situation in which only the section display unit 67 is turned on in the common display area 68 during the second section SC2, making it easier for the manager of the game parlor to check the section display unit 67.

In addition, instead of maintaining the section display unit 67 in the lit state during the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 may be configured to flash at a predetermined cycle during the second section SC2. Also, other displays such as liquid crystal display devices may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate 11b that forms the back portion of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81. An MPU 72 is mounted on one of the board surfaces of the main control board 71, which is the element mounting surface. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be seen from the outside of the board box 81. Note that the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, but it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be seen from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the opposing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 in the board box 81 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 relative to the cabinet 11 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 11, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by combining a number of case bodies in front and behind, and these case bodies are provided with joints 83 that prevent the separation of these case bodies and leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. The joints 83 are arranged in a row on one side of the board box 81, which is approximately a rectangular parallelepiped. As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are used to prevent the separation of the case bodies and the case bodies are separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case bodies again by connecting another joint 83 thereafter. In addition, since the joints 83 are destroyed when the case bodies are separated and a trace is left, it is possible to visually check the joints 83 to see whether the separation of the case bodies is being performed illegally. In addition, a seal seal 84 is attached to one side of the board box 81 other than the side on which the joints 83 are arranged in a row so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave a trace if the seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with a performance control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The performance control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 and stacked on the front door 12. The performance control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that the performance control device 90 is configured with a control board housed in a board box, similar to the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in FIG. 9.

As already explained, the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 is equipped with an MPU 72. The MPU 72 is provided with a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, a RAM 74 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73, a random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from a clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency. In addition to this, the MPU 72 also has an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, the settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and the setting key detection sensor that detects the insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like, and the signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided on the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the section display unit 67, the performance control device 90, etc. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 has a function of guiding a medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and discharging it to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is prohibited. The selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted state and an acceptance prohibited state, and specifically, it operates the path switching piece provided on the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted position and an acceptance prohibited position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching between the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

When a small winning combination is achieved and a medal is paid out, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53. When a game medium is awarded, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media that have been awarded is displayed. When the second section SC2 is reached and a notification start trigger occurs, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display unit 67 so that a notification is given that the second section SC2 is reached. The MPU 72 also controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is given. The MPU 72 also transmits commands to the performance control device 90 at each timing of each game, and when a command for notifying the image display device 63 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is transmitted to the performance control device 90, the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is given. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90, while direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed in the performance control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the subject of relatively complex display control, and direct display control is performed in the MPU 72 for the combined display unit 66, which is the subject of relatively simple display control. This makes it possible to perform both displays that emphasize increasing attention to the performance and displays that emphasize reliability, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to the main control unit 70 and other electronic devices of the slot machine 10. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied to the power supply unit from an external power source, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below a reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and enables the processing state before the power failure to be restored after power is restored. The power supply 54 is also provided with a power failure power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power failure power when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 when the power failure power supply unit can supply backup power (for example, for one or two days).

The performance control device 90 is equipped with a performance control board 91 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various performances. The performance control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 has a built-in ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 93 are executed. It also has built-in a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a random number generating circuit.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. In addition, while backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply unit of the power supply device 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, the RAM 94 may be configured to be supplied with backup power.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63, thereby enabling various notifications and various performances to be performed.

Although not shown, the performance control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), character ROM, video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP is involved in reading and writing data from the video RAM, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns to be displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, etc. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the performance based on a command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, it outputs a drawing list to the VDP that indicates the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the determined execution content of the performance. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. The VDP then outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

For ease of explanation, in the following explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73, and main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the performance control device 90 are referred to as the performance MPU 92, performance ROM 93, and performance RAM 94, respectively.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 10.

In the main process, the initialization process is first performed (step S101). In the initialization process, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and various initial settings are made to the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72. Then, it is determined whether the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), a partial clear process is performed (step S104), and then a setting value update process is performed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), then a full clear process is performed (step S105), and then a setting value update process is performed (step S106). In the partial clear process (step S104), some areas of the main RAM 74 are initialized, and in the full clear process (step S105), all areas of the main RAM 74 are initialized. In the partial clear process, areas in the main RAM 74 other than the area in which the second CB winning data is stored are cleared to "0" and initialized, and in the full clear process, all areas including the area in which the second CB winning data is stored are cleared to "0" and initialized.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read under the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the setting value update process is executed, either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) has been executed before, so when the setting value update process starts, the credit display unit 65 displays the setting value as "1". In the setting value update process, the setting value is updated to "1" each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated when the setting value is "6", the setting value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value selected at that time becomes the setting value set in the current setting value update process, and the setting value update process ends. In this case, the display of the setting value on the credit display unit 65 ends. After that, the process moves to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onwards is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is normal or not (step S108). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power outage flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether the RAM determination value is normal or not (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal or not.

If the answer is yes in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was executed normally. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). In addition, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, a power recovery command is sent to the production MPU 92 to make it recognize that the power recovery processing has been executed (step S113), and then the address before the power failure is returned to (step S114).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S108 to S110, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), all output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). This then results in an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 11. Note that the timer interrupt process is initiated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 that are used in the normal process described below are saved to the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set to "1", and if the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 and power outage processing is executed.

The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply unit 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power outage processing, first it is determined whether the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is returned to, and the command transmission is terminated. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. Then, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power outage is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether the data in the main RAM 74 is normal or not is calculated and saved in the main RAM 74, and further access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes from step S204 onwards are carried out. In step S204, a watchdog timer clear process is carried out to initialize the value of a watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is carried out to enable the main MPU 72 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S206, a stepping motor control process is carried out to drive the stepping motors provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to spin these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In step S207, the status of various sensors connected to the input ports is read, and a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S208, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S210, a command output process is performed to send various commands to the performance side MPU 92. In step S211, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register that were saved to the main side RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding register in the main side MPU 72.

In step S213, a management process is executed to manage the game history and to display the contents corresponding to the management results on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 described below to the total number of games is calculated, and the calculated ratio is displayed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the calculation of the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 to the total number of games may be configured to be performed for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may continue without initializing the information on the ratio performed for each set value. Thereafter, in step S214, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 12.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, a start waiting process is performed (step S302). In the start waiting process, if any replay winning has been established in the previous game, a bet setting equal to the previous bet number is set in the bet number setting counter 74a (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74. The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the number of bets for the game to be executed by the main MPU 72. If a replay winning has not been established in the previous game, if the current game state is not the second CB state ST3, the bet upper limit number for the current game is set to "3", and if the current game state is the second CB state ST3, the bet upper limit number for the current game is set to "2". On the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is not the current bet upper limit number, it is determined whether or not one or more virtual medals have been stored and a valid bet operation has been performed. The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. When the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more and a valid bet operation is performed, a bet setting process is executed.

In the bet setting process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper bet limit, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set to the upper bet limit and the value of the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the upper bet limit, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the bet number setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set to "2" and the value of the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0."

In the start waiting process, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 and one medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is less than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1, and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the credit counter 74b in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1. If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of accumulated memories (specifically, "50"), an acceptance prohibition process is executed. When the acceptance prohibition process is executed, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

In the start waiting process, if the settlement button 51 is operated, the settlement process is executed. In the settlement process, if a replay win has not been achieved, the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b are discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, if a replay win has been achieved, the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b are discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

After executing the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether or not the bet setting for the number of bets required to start the game has been completed (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If a positive determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the main line ML is activated and then the reception prohibition process is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Then, in step S306, a start setting process is executed to set various settings when the game is started, in step S307, a role selection process is executed to select roles for the current game, and in step S308, a reel control process is executed to drive and control each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the current role selection process.

Then, the medium granting process is executed (step S309). In the medium granting process, if a small win has been achieved in the current game, a process is executed to grant the player a number of game media corresponding to the small win. Specifically, when granting virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and if the value of the credit counter 74b has reached the upper limit of the number of stored memories, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of stored memories is paid out to the medal tray 59. In addition, in the medium granting process, the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a response process is executed at the end of the game to enable the setting of the game state and game zone corresponding to the result of this game (step S310). In addition, an external output setting process is executed to output the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall (step S311). After that, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S312). As a result of the acceptance permission process being executed, the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

Next, the role selection process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 13.

In step S401, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the random number at that time is latched from the random number circuit 75. The random number circuit 75 generates random numbers between "0" and "65535", and when the main MPU 72 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, making it possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-running counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for determining whether the winning combination is a winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S402). In this slot machine 10, six setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which setting value corresponds to which winning probability the lottery process for the winning combination is to be executed. The winning probability is more favorable for the player when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n". Specifically, since the winning probability of a predetermined combination is higher when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n", the winning probability is more favorable for the player when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n". In addition, even if the setting value is the same level, it is more favorable for the player when the number of gaming media bet is "3" than when it is "2". In addition, there are a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 as game states. In step S402, a lottery table is selected that corresponds to the combination of the current setting value, the current number of bets, and the current game state.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be explained using the example where the setting value is "3". Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role lottery table when three coins are bet, which is selected when the number of bets is "3", and Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role lottery table when two coins are bet, which is selected when the number of bets is "2". Note that the following explanation will refer to the explanatory diagram in Figure 16 as appropriate.

As shown in Figures 14 and 15, index values IV are set in the winning combination table for both three and two bets. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (i.e., winning combination) that will result in a win, and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the random number circuit 75. The number of index values IV is the same for three bets and two bets, and the type of winning data set for each index value IV is the same for three bets and two bets, except for index value IV=17.

Specifically, the first bell winning data is set to the index values IV = 1 to 6, and one of the first to sixth compensation winning data is set. When the index value IV = 1 is a winning, as shown in FIG. 16, if the first stop (the reel on which the stop command was first issued) is the left reel 32L, the second stop (the reel on which the stop command was second issued) is the center reel 32M, and the third stop (the reel on which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and the first compensation winning may be established in other cases. When the index value IV = 2 is a winning, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and the fourth compensation winning may be established in other cases. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=3, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the third supplementary winning may be made. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=4, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the sixth supplementary winning may be made. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=5, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the second supplementary winning may be made. When an index value IV=6 is reached and a win occurs, if the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, the first bell win will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the fifth supplementary win may occur.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, when in the non-CB state, reel control that allows up to four symbols to slide after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In other words, reel control that stops each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By performing such reel control, it becomes easier to achieve a winning combination that corresponds to a winning role, and it becomes possible to prevent a winning combination that corresponds to a non-winning role from being achieved. However, because the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, if there are five or more symbols among the constituent symbols that make up the combination of symbols for establishing a win on one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also called a "missed win"). The first bell win, the second bell win, and the various replay wins are winning modes that do not cause a miss if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, while the first to ninth compensation wins, the first watermelon win, the second watermelon win, the cherry win, the first CB win, and the second CB win are winning modes that may cause a miss depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index values IV = 7 to 9 are set with the second bell winning data and with any of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data. When the index value IV = 7 is a winning combination, as shown in FIG. 16, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell winning combination is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the seventh compensation winning combination may be achieved. When the index value IV = 8 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second bell winning combination is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the ninth compensation winning combination may be achieved. If the index value IV=9 is a win, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second bell win will be achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44; otherwise, the eighth supplementary win may be achieved.

As shown in Figures 14 and 15, the first bell winning data is set for index value IV = 10. If a win occurs with index value IV = 10, the first bell win is guaranteed to occur, regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, as shown in Figure 16.

As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the first watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=11. When a win occurs with index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 16, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first watermelon winning may not be achieved. As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the second watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=12. When a win occurs with index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 16, the second watermelon winning may be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the second watermelon winning may not be achieved.

As shown in Figures 14 and 15, only cherry winning data is set for index value IV=13. When a win occurs with index value IV=13, a cherry winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in Figure 16. However, depending on the operation timing of left stop button 42 relative to the spinning position of left reel 32L, a cherry winning may not occur.

As shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the first chance replay winning data is set for the index value IV=14. When the index value IV=14 is won, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, as shown in FIG. 16. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the second chance replay winning data is set for the index value IV=15. When the index value IV=15 is won, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, as shown in FIG. 16. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV=16. If a win occurs with index value IV = 16, as shown in Figure 16, a normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

For the index value IV=17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 14 in the case of the role selection table when three coins are bet, and only the second CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 15 in the case of the role selection table when two coins are bet. In other words, the first CB winning data is set as a winning role only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning can only be achieved when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". Also, the second CB winning data is set as a winning role only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning can only be achieved when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", the first CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 16. However, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be achieved depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the gaming medium is "2", the second CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 16. However, the second CB winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

Here, winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is erased in the game in which the winning was made, regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning was made, and is not carried over to subsequent games following the game in which the winning was made. In contrast, the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are stored and held until the corresponding winning is made, even in subsequent games following the game in which the winning was made, except when the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is performed (partial clearing process (step S104) or full clearing process (step S105) for the first CB winning data, and full clearing process (step S105) for the second CB winning data). In this case, in a game in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, if the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "3", and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". Also, if the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "2", and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". This makes it possible to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored even if either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data has already been stored, and makes it possible to prevent multiple CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the role selection table for betting three coins in FIG. 14 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, the probability of winning when the index value IV=3, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 are each about 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are each about 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/9.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13 is about 1/423. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 14 is approximately 1/328. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 15 is approximately 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 16 is approximately 1/7.3. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/3.3.

On the other hand, when the role selection table for two bets in FIG. 15 is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is lower than when the role selection table for three bets is selected. Specifically, when the role selection table for two bets is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is 2/3 or less than when the role selection table for three bets is selected. This makes it possible to increase the probability of a small role win accompanied by a gaming medium and a replay win that grants a replay in a game where a gaming medium "3" is bet, compared to a game where a gaming medium "2" is bet.

However, when the role selection table for betting two coins is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/2.2. In contrast, when the role selection table for betting three coins is selected as described above, the probability of winning when index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/3.3. This makes it possible to make the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in a game executed when "2" gaming media is bet higher than the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in a game executed when "3" gaming media is bet.

In addition to the role selection table when 3 coins are bet and the role selection table when 2 coins are bet, the main ROM 73 also stores a CB selection table that is referenced in the role selection process (FIG. 13) in each of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. Only one index value IV is set in the CB selection table, and normal replay winning data is set in that one index value IV. The probability of winning with that index value IV is 3/10, and if the index value IV is won, a normal replay win is established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R if the left stop button 42 is operated at a specified timing. If the left stop button 42 is not operated at a specified timing, a normal replay win is not established even if normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV is won but the left stop button 42 is not operated at a specified timing, or if the index value IV is not won, a first bell win may be established.

Here, the winning probability is the same for index values IV of "1" to "6" other than index values IV=12 and 15. This applies whether the number of bets on gaming media is "3" or "2". In contrast, the winning probability of index values IV=12 and 15 differs between the setting values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the winning probability of an index value IV=12 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the winning probability increases as the setting value increases, and is highest when the setting value is "6". Also, the winning probability of an index value IV=15 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the winning probability increases as the setting value increases, and is highest when the setting value is "6". This makes it possible to set differences in the degree of advantage between the setting values of "1" to "6".

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process for winning or losing a role (FIG. 13), after the lottery table is selected in step S402, the index value IV is set to "1" (step S403), and then the judgment value DV used when judging the winning or losing role is set (step S404). In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the value of the random number acquired in step S401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (index value IV=1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, a win/loss determination is made for the combination that corresponds to the index value IV (step S405). In determining whether the combination is a win/loss determination, a determination is made as to whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535" (step S405: YES), a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning data that corresponds to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 (step S406).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been obtained. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S407), and then it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S404, and the judgment of the hand continues. At this time, in step S404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S405, the hand is judged to be a win/loss based on the judgment value DV.

When the processing of step S406 is executed, or when a negative judgment is made in step S408, it means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In this case, a first stop information setting process is executed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S409). After that, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in step S410, and a first control process for the play area is executed in step S411. The processing contents of these steps S410 and S411 will be explained later.

Then, the stop order notification control process is executed (step S412). In the stop order notification control process, if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 (see FIG. 19) described later, and if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 has been won in the role selection process (FIG. 13), a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the image display device 63 of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won, provided that the number of bets in the current game is "3". Furthermore, if the winning combination has an index value IV of 7 to 9 in the lottery process (FIG. 13), and the number of bets in the current game is "3", a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in the establishment of the second bell prize is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production-side MPU 92 to notify the image display device 63 of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will result in the establishment of the second bell prize. When the production-side MPU 92 receives a command corresponding to the notification of the stop order as described above, it controls the display of the image display device 63 so that the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that corresponds to the command is notified. Note that if the number of bets on the current game is "2", even if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5, the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 will not notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the configuration may be such that the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified in the same way as when the number of bets is "3".

Then, the transmission process of the game start command is executed (step S413). In this transmission process, if any role is won in the current role lottery process (FIG. 13), information corresponding to the winning role, information corresponding to the current game state, and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S410 and S411 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is sent to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, it grasps various information in the current game from the game start command and determines the content of the performance in a manner according to the various information grasped. Then, the data table corresponding to the determined content of the performance is read from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and executes the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 according to the read data table.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.

First, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (step S501). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was started in the previous game, and if not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and sets the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate. After that, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop button 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Then, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S502). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S502 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are spinning have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated (step S503). If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S502, and the process of step S502 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. If a stop command has been generated, the stop command command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S504). The stop command command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command has been transmitted, the stop control process shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the reels that are spinning.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the time the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is confirmed (step S505). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 (step S506).

In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop buttons 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is, a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S506, one of the values "0" to "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

Then, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol that will actually stop at the base position (step S507). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol (step S508), and if so, a reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S509). Then, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S510). If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S511), and the process returns to step S502.

The stop information here refers to information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 13). By using this stop information, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reaching symbol that reaches the base position when each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, slip number data showing the correspondence between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, this is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc.

The processes for setting the above stop information include a first stop information setting process executed in step S409 of the role selection process (FIG. 13) and a second stop information setting process executed in step S511 of the reel control process (FIG. 17). In the first stop information setting process, the stop information is set according to the result of the role selection process. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop results of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

When it is determined in step S510 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S512. In the winning determination process, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is identified. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role in the role selection process, and if it is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role, a winning role is established and a winning corresponding process is executed. In the winning corresponding process, if the winning is a small role winning, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that a replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S513). The winning result command contains data indicating whether or not a win has been achieved this time, and if a win has been achieved, contains data indicating the type of win.

Next, the response process at the end of play, which is executed in step S310 of the normal process (FIG. 12), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 18. Note that since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

First, CB processing is executed to control the transition and progress of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S601). In the CB processing, if the first CB winning is established in the current game, the first CB state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the first CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the game has transitioned to the first CB state ST2 is sent to the production side MPU 92. This changes the game state to the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, the game is executed only when "3" game media is bet. In the CB processing, if the second CB winning is established in the current game, the second CB state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the second CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the game has transitioned to the second CB state ST3 is sent to the production side MPU 92. As a result, the game state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the game is executed only when "2" gaming media are bet. In the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, if the first bell is won in the current game, the value of the total award counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1. The total award counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the total number of gaming media awarded in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and is cleared to "0" when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. If the value of the total award counter after incrementing by 1 becomes "30", which is the end reference number for the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the CB state flag corresponding to the current CB state ST2, ST3 is cleared to "0". Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB state ST2, ST3 has ended is sent to the production side MPU 92.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, after executing the CB process in step S601, if the game state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S602: NO), jump to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S603). Specifically, if the game state is the normal game state ST1, execute the normal process (step S604), if the game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4, execute the pseudo bonus process (step S605), if the game state is the AT state ST5, execute the AT process (step S606), and if the game state is the end preparation state ST6, execute the second control process of the game section (step S607). In addition, if any of the normal process of step S604, the pseudo bonus process of step S605, and the AT process of step S606 is executed, execute the second control process of the game section (step S607). In addition, the second control process (step S607) for the game area is also executed when the game is in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. The processing contents of steps S604 to S607 will be explained in detail later.

If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, a positive judgment is made in step S602, and the normal processing in step S604, the pseudo bonus processing in step S605, and the AT processing in step S606 are not executed. Therefore, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for progressing to the normal game state ST1, the processing for progressing to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the processing for progressing to the AT state ST5 are not executed. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second control processing of the game section in step S607 is executed. Therefore, even if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for progressing to the second section SC2 is executed.

<About game status and game area>
Next, the game states and game intervals will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game intervals existing in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has four game states: a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo bonus state ST4, an AT state ST5, and a preparation-for-ending state ST6. These game states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the player remains by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74. In addition, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 that occurs in the normal game state ST1 ends, or when the end preparation state ST6 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, it is possible to play one game regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2".

In the normal game state ST1, whether three coins or two coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") is 0 or less. In addition, in the normal game state ST1, there are a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the player enters when a first CB win occurs while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the first CB state ST2, one game can be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "3", but one game cannot be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "2". The second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the player enters when a second CB win occurs while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "2", but because the bet limit is set to "2", it is not possible to bet "3" gaming media.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that do not increase the number of game media owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that reduce the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state compared to the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state.

The pseudo bonus state ST4 is a game state that is entered when the conditions for entering the pseudo bonus state ST4 are met in the normal game state ST1. The pseudo bonus state ST4 ends when the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0". When the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the conditions for entering the AT state ST5 are not met, the game transitions to the end preparation state ST6.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to play one game regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2." In the pseudo bonus state ST4, there exist a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if an index value IV of 1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. Also, in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if an index value IV of 7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won is announced. If the first bell or the second bell is won, "15" game media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media awarded in one game in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if three coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game exceeds "0", and in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if two coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game is 0 or less.

The AT state ST5 is a game state to which a transition is made when the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is met in the pseudo bonus state ST4. The AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of game media awarded becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. If the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 described below being met, the game state transitions to the end preparation state ST6. Also, if the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 described below is met, the game state transitions to the normal game state ST1.

In the AT state ST5, one game can be played regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2." In the AT state ST5, there are a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. Also, in the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won is announced. If the first bell or the second bell is won, "15" game media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media awarded in one game in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, if three coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game exceeds "0", and in the AT state ST5, if two coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game is 0 or less.

The end preparation state ST6 is a game state to which the player transitions when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the transition condition to the AT state ST5 being met. The end preparation state ST6 is also a game state to which the player transitions when the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, being met.

The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game has been played. When the end preparation state ST6 ends, the normal game state ST1 is entered. In the end preparation state ST6, one game can be played whether the number of gaming media bets is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST6 is a game state in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is 0 or less whether three or two coins are bet. In addition, the end preparation state ST6 has a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In a configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a game zone is set in addition to these game states ST1 to ST6. A first zone SC1 and a second zone SC2 are set as game zones. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the factors that determine the game situation are the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", the setting values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST6, and the game zones of the first zone SC1 and the second zone SC2.

The first section SC1 is a section in which an advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4 and AT state ST5) is not initiated in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media awarded in one game") may exceed "0" by notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows the player to win different winning combinations depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the advantageous gaming state does not continue. When a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered as the first section SC1. In addition, when an initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 is entered.

In the first section SC1, a transition opportunity to the second section SC2 occurs based on the lottery process (FIG. 13), and the first section SC1 transitions to the second section SC2. In this case, if a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition opportunity to the second section SC2 may occur, while even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition opportunity to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, a player who expects a transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 needs to execute a game with a bet number of "3" rather than executing a game with a bet number of "2". The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued. The second section SC2 ends when the pseudo bonus state ST4, AT state ST5, or end preparation state ST6 ends and transitions to the normal gaming state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, a transition to the first section SC1 occurs.

The ending condition for the second section SC2 is that either of the following conditions is met: the total number of games played by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), or the limited total net increase in game media reaches the upper limit net increase (specifically, 2400) by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1. The limited total net increase in game media refers to the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media awarded by games played while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is awarded) from the total number of game media consumed to play games while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no games are being played). If either of these ending conditions is met, even if the game is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 ends in the game in which the ending condition is met, and the second section SC2 ends, transitioning to the first section SC1 and normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

The normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3 can occur in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the end preparation state ST6 are never occurred in the first section SC1, but only in the second section SC2.

In the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, a lottery process for transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be executed based on the results of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for each game, but the lottery process for transition is executed in a game with a bet number of "3" but not in a game with a bet number of "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the value of the release game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time a game is executed, and if the value of the release game number counter after the decrement is "0", the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is confirmed, but the decrement of the release game number counter is executed in a game with a bet number of "3", but not in a game with a bet number of "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to execute a game with a bet number of "3" than to execute a game with a bet number of "2".

Even if it is advantageous to execute a game with a bet number of "3" in the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, the number of game media awarded in a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is added as the limited total net increase in game media in the second section SC2, and a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, even though a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player, the game contributes to the side that establishes the ending condition of the second section SC2. From this perspective, when the player is in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, or the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to have a game with a bet of "3" be played than to have a game with a bet of "2" be played.

In the second section SC2, the first CB winning may occur and the second CB winning may occur, similar to the first section SC1. If the first CB winning occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even when the first CB state ST2 occurs and after the first CB state ST2 ends. Also, if the second CB winning occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even when the second CB state ST3 occurs and after the second CB state ST3 ends. As already explained, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are both game states in which the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is less than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. In other words, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, games played in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added to the total number of games played as the second section SC2 continues. In other words, even though the games played in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, those games end up contributing to the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2. Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it will be even more disadvantageous to the player.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be described. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 20. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S411, which is a process executed after the winning/losing judgment of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 13).

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S701). The second section flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the play section is the second section SC2 or not; when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. When the second section flag is set to "1" (step S701: YES), the processing from step S702 onwards is not executed. As a result, when it is the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery processing in step S706 and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S710 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S701: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702: YES), the processing from step S703 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing to set it to the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit lottery processing in step S706, and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S710 are not executed.

If the current game state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S702: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S703). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S703: NO), the processing from step S704 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game in which the number of bets is "2" even if it is the first section SC1, the processing for setting the number of bets to the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit lottery processing in step S706, and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S710 are not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S703: YES), it is determined whether any index value IV has been won in the current role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S704). If the current role selection process (FIG. 13) is a miss (step S704: NO), the processes from step S705 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if the first section is SC1, if the role selection process (FIG. 13) is a miss, the process to set it to the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit selection process in step S706 and the selection process for the number of games to be released in step S710 are not executed.

If any of the index values IV is selected in the current role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S704: YES), the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the number of continued games counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total number of wins counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 are both cleared to "0" (step S705). Setting the second section flag to "1" results in the second section SC2.

The continued game number counter 74c is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games that have been played since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. When the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the second section SC2 reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the second section SC2 ends at the game that has been reached, even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle of the state, and the state transitions to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is the amount obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded). If the value of the total winnings counter 74d reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit of the net increase in number of coins (specifically, 2,400 coins) in the second section SC2, even if the game is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the value is reached, and the game transitions to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

Then, a direct hit lottery process is executed (step S706). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not a direct hit wins into the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13), if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a 2% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=12 is won, there is a 1% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=13 is won, there is a 10% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=14 is won, there is a 5% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the index value IV=15 is won, there is a 2% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the role selection process (FIG. 13) for an index value IV, the higher the probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the role selection process (FIG. 13).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win to pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S707: YES), the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S708). The first transition confirmation flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that a win to transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 has occurred in the direct hit lottery process (step S706) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition the game state to pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

Then, the section display unit 67 is turned on (step S709). In the section display unit 67 turning on process, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start notifying that the section is in the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S707: NO), a lottery process for the number of release games is executed (step S710). The number of release games is the number of games required until a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs. In the lottery process for the number of release games, a lottery table for the number of release games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is first read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. The number of release games is then selected by comparing the numerical information obtained from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of release games. In this case, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of release games. In addition, the probability of selecting each of these numbers of release games is the same. After the lottery process for the number of release games is executed, the number of release games selected in the lottery process for the number of release games is set in the release game number counter in the master RAM 74 (step S711). The release game number counter is a counter that is used by the master MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of release games.

Then, a lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S712). In the lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67, a lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether the section display unit 67 should be turned on from the beginning when the second section SC2 is set this time (i.e., immediately turned on), or whether the section display unit 67 should be turned on when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is subsequently entered (i.e., waiting to be turned on). In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13), if the index value IV=1 to 10 is selected, there is a 50% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected and a 50% probability that the standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 65% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected and a 35% probability that the standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 62% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected and a 38% probability that the standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=13 is selected, there is an 80% probability that the immediate lighting will be selected and a 20% probability that the standby lighting will be selected; % probability of waiting for light to be selected, if index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 75% probability of selecting instant light and a 25% probability of waiting for light to be selected, if index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 70% probability of selecting instant light and a 30% probability of waiting for light to be selected, if index value IV=16 is selected, there is a 40% probability of selecting instant light and a 60% probability of waiting for light to be selected, and if index value IV=17 is selected, there is a 30% probability of selecting instant light and a 70% probability of waiting for light to be selected. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the role selection process (FIG. 13) for an index value IV, the higher the probability of selecting instant light.

If immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) for the section display unit 67 (step S713: YES), lighting process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S714). In the lighting process for the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to a on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is in the second section SC2.

On the other hand, if standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) for the section display unit 67 (step S713: NO), the standby flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S715). The standby flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from an off state to a on state in the second section SC2.

Next, the second control process of the play area executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 21. The second control process of the play area is executed in step S607 of the response process at the end of play (FIG. 18). As described above, the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the second control process of the play area is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S801: YES), the state of the flag in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the current game state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S802). If the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without transitioning to the AT state 5, or if the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, the game transitions to the end preparation state ST6.

If the game is in the end preparation state ST6 (step S802: YES), it is determined whether the end preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S803). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to determine whether one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6. In the pseudo bonus process (step S605) in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), if it is determined that the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 0 games and that the game will transition to the normal game state ST1 after that, a flag is set to set the game to the end preparation state ST6 and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the AT process (step S606) in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), if it is determined that the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" and that the game will transition to the normal game state ST1, a flag is set to set the game to the end preparation state ST6 and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the end preparation complete flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S804), and the processing from step S805 onwards is executed. If the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), this means that one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, processing is executed to end the second section SC2.

Specifically, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is first executed (step S814). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". This makes the game section the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the game is in the AT state ST5, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating that the game is in the AT state ST5, including a counter for storing the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. Note that even if the game is in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are not terminated and are continued as they are.

After that, if the section display unit 67 is in a lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an unlit state (step S815). This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. Then, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S816). This causes the production side MPU 92 to execute a performance corresponding to the end of the second section SC2.

If the game is not in the end preparation state ST6 (step S802: NO), or if the processing of step S804 has been executed, the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the master RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S805). As already explained, the continued game number counter 74c is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games that have been played since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the continued game number counter 74c after adding 1 is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S806). If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than 1500, this means that the ending condition for the second section SC2 has been met. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S806, and processing is executed in steps S814 to S816 to end the second section SC2. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 is entered, and the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered, even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle of the AT state ST5.

If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S806: NO), it is determined whether any of the first chance replay win, second chance replay win, and normal replay win has been achieved in the current game (step S807). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S807, and also whether the current game is in any of the game states of normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3, pseudo bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5.

If no replay win has been achieved (step S807: NO), the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S808). In this case, even if a replay win was achieved in the previous game and the current game is a game that corresponds to a replay due to the achievement of the replay win, the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined difference, calculated by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded).

Then, it is determined whether any of the minor winnings (1st to 9th compensation winnings, 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning, and cherry winning) that will result in the awarding of gaming media in the current game has been achieved (step S809). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S809, and also whether the current game is in any of the gaming states of the normal gaming state ST1, the 1st CB state ST2, the 2nd CB state ST3, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5. If the determination in step S809 is positive, the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S810).

If a negative judgment is made in step S809, or if the processing of step S810 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than 0 (step S811). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S811: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S812).

As described above, since the bet number for the current game is subtracted from the total winnings counter 74d in step S808, for example, if no small winnings are achieved in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, the value of the total winnings counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative judgment in step S811, the total winnings counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S812. As a result, when the value obtained by subtracting the "total number of game media consumed to execute games in a situation where the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when games are not being executed)" from the "total number of game media awarded by games executed in a situation where the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when no game media is awarded)" is set as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the limited total net increase in game media, which is the increase in the above-mentioned predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, can be measured using the total winnings counter 74d.

If a positive judgment is made in step S807, if a positive judgment is made in step S811, or if the processing of step S812 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400" (step S813). If the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is established. In this case, a positive judgment is made in step S813, and the processing to end the second section SC2 in steps S814 to S816 is executed. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal game state ST1.

If any replay win is achieved, a positive determination is made in step S807, and the processing of steps S808 to S812 is not executed. In a game in which a replay win is achieved, the gaming media owned by the player at the start of the game are used to set the bet, but as a benefit from the replay win, the player can replay a new game with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game in which the replay win was achieved. In other words, the number of gaming media owned by the player does not change in a game in which a replay win is achieved. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S808 to S812 in a game in which a replay win is achieved, it is possible to omit the execution of the processing for changing the value of the total winnings counter 74d in a game in which the number of gaming media owned by the player does not change, and it is possible to avoid the execution of unnecessary processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been achieved, in step S813, it is determined whether the value of the total winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400". As a result, even if the value of the total winnings counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400" in a game prior to the game in which a replay win has been achieved, but the initialization process for the second section SC2 has not been performed due to noise or other reasons, it is possible to determine that the value of the total winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400" in the game in which a replay win has been achieved thereafter, and it is possible to perform the initialization process for the second section SC2.

If a negative judgment is made in step S813, an ending corresponding process is executed (step S817). In the ending corresponding process, it is judged whether the sum of the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the main RAM 74 and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 divided by the expected acquisition value of the gaming medium in the AT state ST5 is equal to or greater than the upper limit game number of the second section SC2, provided that the first ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1". The AT continuation counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of awarded gaming media in the AT state ST5. The expected acquisition value of the gaming medium in one game in the AT state ST5 is about 5 pieces. As already explained, the upper limit game number of the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games. Note that the upper limit game number of the second section SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games.

If the value of the above sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, the first ending flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The first ending flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the number of games played in the second section SC2, measured using the continued game counter 74c, is likely to reach the upper limit number of games. When the first ending flag is set to "1", no addition of the remaining number of points to be awarded occurs in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to prevent further addition of the remaining number of points to be awarded in the AT state ST5 in a situation where the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met.

In addition, in this slot machine 10, the above sum value will not exceed the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 during the pseudo bonus state ST4, but it may be configured so that it can exceed the upper limit number of games. In this case, it is preferable to set the first ending flag to "1" when the sum of the value of the continuing game number counter 74c in the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the value obtained by dividing the value of the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 by the expected acquisition value of the gaming medium in the AT state ST5 becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2.

When the first ending flag is set to "1", the first ending command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period, if the game state at that time is AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 uses the reception of the first ending command as a trigger to change the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, when the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period and the game state is not AT state ST5, when the game state transitions to AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 changes the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period.

In the ending response process, on the condition that the second ending flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", it is determined whether the sum of the value of the total acquisition counter 74d in the main RAM 74 and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2. As already explained, the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2 is set to 2400. Note that the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2 is not limited to 2400, and may be less than 2400 or more than 2400.

If the value of the above sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2, the second ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The second ending flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that there is a high possibility that the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media measured using the total acquisition counter 74d will reach the upper limit net increase. When the second ending flag is set to "1", no addition of the remaining number of awards occurs in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to prevent further addition of the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 in a situation where the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met.

In addition, in this slot machine 10, the above sum will never exceed the upper limit of net gain in the second section SC2 during the pseudo bonus state ST4, but it may be configured so that it can exceed the upper limit of net gain. In this case, the second ending flag may be set to "1" when the sum of the value of the total acquisition counter 74d in the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 multiplied by the expected acquisition value of gaming media in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74, is equal to or greater than the upper limit of net gain in the second section SC2.

When the second ending flag is set to "1", a second ending command is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period, if the game state at that time is AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 uses the reception of the second ending command as a trigger to change the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to an execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, when the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production has not yet started in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period and the game state is not AT state ST5, when the game state transitions to AT state ST5, the production side MPU 92 changes the execution mode of the production in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to an execution mode corresponding to the ending period.

<Regarding normal gaming state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal gaming state ST1 will be described.

In the normal game state ST1, in the advantageous lottery process (step S410) at the start of the game in the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 13), the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the current game state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". In the lottery process for the current hand (FIG. 13), it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 11 to 15 has been won, and if it has been won, the transition lottery process is executed. In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. If the transition lottery process results in a win to transition to pseudo bonus state ST4, the second transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the normal game state ST1, in the normal processing (step S604) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 18), if the first transition confirmation flag or the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", a process is executed to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. As already explained, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1" when a direct hit is won in the direct hit lottery processing (step S706) in the first control processing of the game area (FIG. 20), and the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" when a transition is won in the transition lottery processing in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (step S410), as already explained. If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "50", thereby setting the pseudo bonus state ST4 to continue until 50 games with the number of bets of "3" are executed. If the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "20", thereby setting a pseudo bonus state ST4 that continues until 20 games with a bet amount of "3" have been played. In addition, a command indicating a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92. By receiving this command, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In the normal process (step S604), if neither the first transition confirmation flag nor the second transition confirmation flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1", the value of the release game number counter in the master RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 under the conditions that the second section flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1", the current game state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is "3". If the value of the release game number counter after subtraction of 1 is "0", the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the master RAM 74 is set to "20", thereby setting the pseudo bonus state ST4 in which the game with the bet number of "3" is executed 20 times. In addition, a command indicating that the state has been changed to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is sent to the production side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the production side MPU 92 causes the production corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

In the normal processing (step S604), when processing for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed and the lighting standby flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is the second section SC2.

<About the pseudo bonus state ST4>
Next, the processing contents in the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be described. Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing the processing for the advantageous state at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in step S410, which is a process executed after the winning/losing judgment of the role is completed in the role lottery processing (Fig. 13) and before the first control processing (step S411) of the play area. The advantageous state processing at the start of the game is executed when the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in a situation in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S901). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S901: NO), the processing from step S902 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game where the number of bets is "2", even if the game is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5, the processing from step S902 onwards is not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S901: YES), it is determined whether the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: YES), the processing from step S903 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if the pseudo bonus state flag or the AT state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", if the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing from step S903 onwards is not executed.

If the current game state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S902: NO), it is determined whether the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S903). If the current game state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S903: NO), this means that the current game state is the AT state ST5, so AT state processing at the start of the game is executed (step S904). The AT state processing at the start of the game will be described later.

If the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S903: YES), it is determined whether the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S905). The AT transition confirmation flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to determine whether the transition conditions to the AT state ST5 have already been met in the pseudo bonus state ST4. If the AT transition confirmation flag has already been set to "1" (step S905: YES), this means that the transition conditions to the AT state ST5 have already been met in the current pseudo bonus state ST4, and therefore no processing is performed to determine whether to transition to the AT state ST5 in steps S906 and after.

If the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S905: NO), the AT transition lottery process is executed (step S907) on the condition that the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process for the role in the current game (Figure 13) (step S906: YES). In the AT transition lottery process, using the AT transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 after the end of the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13), if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 20% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 10% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=13 is selected, there is a 40% probability of winning the AT transition, if the index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 30% probability of winning the AT transition, and if the index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 20% probability of winning the AT transition. In this case, the lower the probability of winning the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning the AT transition. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13).

If the AT transition is won (step S908: YES), the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S909). After that, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S910). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance indicating that the AT transition has been won.

Next, the pseudo bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23. The pseudo bonus processing is executed in step S605 of the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the pseudo bonus processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1001). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1001: NO), the processing from step S1002 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus process (Figure 23) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of games played in the CB state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the CB state is transitioned to in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, after the CB state ends, the pseudo bonus state ST4 will resume from the state of the remaining number of continued games immediately before transitioning to the CB state.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S1001: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1002). After that, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003: YES), it is determined whether the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1004).

If the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), it means that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 has been met in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1005). Then, information corresponding to "200", which is the initial number of awards in the AT state ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1006). In addition, the AT state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007). Then, an AT transition command indicating that a transition to the AT state ST5 will occur is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1008). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to perform a performance indicating that a transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S1004: NO), a process for setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1009). In this setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in this setting process, the end preparation state flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to identify that the game is in the end preparation state ST6, and setting the end preparation state flag to "1" changes the game state to the end preparation state ST6. In addition, the end preparation complete flag in the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1010). As already explained, the end preparation complete flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to identify whether or not one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6.

As already explained, in the end preparation state ST6, if a positive judgment is made in step S802 in the second control process for the game section (FIG. 21) and the end preparation complete flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" and then processing is executed to determine whether the ending condition for the second section SC2 has been met, and the second control process for the game section in the current game (FIG. 21) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing is executed to terminate the second section SC2 and transition to the first section SC1 (steps S814 to S816). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo bonus state ST4 ended ends.

After executing the processing of step S1010, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1011). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to perform a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

<About AT state ST5>
Next, the processing contents in the AT state ST5 will be described. Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing the processing for the AT state at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the processing for the AT state at the start of the game is executed in step S904 in the processing for the advantageous state at the start of the game (Fig. 22).

First, it is determined whether or not either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1101). As already explained, the first ending flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the number of games played in the second section SC2, which is measured using the continued game number counter 74c, is likely to reach the upper limit number of games. As already explained, the second ending flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the limited total net increase in the number of game media, which is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d, is likely to reach the upper limit net increase. If either the first ending flag or the second ending flag is set to "1" (step S1101: YES), the processing from step S1102 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of games played in the second section SC2 is likely to reach the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the limited total net increase in the number of game media is likely to reach the upper limit net increase, the processing for adding the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 from step S1102 onwards is not executed.

If both the first ending flag and the second ending flag are not set to "1" (step S1101: NO), the lottery process for adding is executed (step S1103) on the condition that the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 13) has won one of the index values IV = 11 to 15. In the lottery process for adding, a lottery is used to determine whether or not to generate an addition that increases the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5, using the lottery counter for adding provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. In this case, two types of modes are set for increasing the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5 when an addition is won: a direct hit mode that increases the remaining number of game media immediately in the game, and a main premonition state mode that increases the remaining number of game media when the number of waiting games (specifically 10 games) corresponding to the premonition state is consumed from the game. In addition, in the lottery process for adding, even if an addition is not won, it may be a false premonition win. If a false premonition is won, the false premonition state will be generated from that game until the number of waiting games mentioned above (specifically, 10 games) has been played.

In both the main premonition state and the false premonition state, the content of the presentation is determined according to a table corresponding to the premonition state so that the presentation content of each game on the image display device 63 is more likely to be performed with a high expectation of an increase in the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5. In this case, in the main premonition state and the false premonition state, a more flashy presentation is performed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of the main premonition state and the false premonition state, a presentation in which the same character is displayed between multiple games or a presentation according to a series of stories may be performed. Also, the main premonition state is more likely to perform a presentation with a high expectation than the false premonition state. In the main premonition state, a presentation is displayed to make the player aware that an increase in the remaining number of awards will occur in the final game of the game with the above number of waiting games, and in the false premonition state, a presentation is displayed to make the player aware that an increase in the remaining number of awards will not occur in the final game of the game with the above number of waiting games.

Specifically, regarding the additional lottery process, when the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 5% probability of a direct win with the number of grant targets being 30, a 5% probability of a real premonition state win with the number of grant targets being 30, a 5% probability of a direct win with the number of grant targets being 50, a 5% probability of a real premonition state win with the number of grant targets being 50, a 10% probability of a false premonition state win, and a 70% probability of a miss. When the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 5% probability of a direct win with the number of grant targets being 20, a 5% probability of a real premonition state win with the number of grant targets being 20, a 5% probability of a direct win with the number of grant targets being 40, a 5% probability of a real premonition state win with the number of grant targets being 40, a 10% probability of a false premonition state win, and a 70% probability of a miss. If index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 30 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 30 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 50 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 50 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 100 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 100 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 20% chance that a false premonition state win will be selected, and there is a 20% chance that it will be a miss. If index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 20 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 20 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 40 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 40 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a direct win with 90 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 10% chance that a real premonition state win with 90 coins to be awarded will be selected, there is a 20% chance that a false premonition state win will be selected, and there is a 20% chance that it will be a miss. If index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 5% chance that a direct win with 30 coins will be selected, a 5% chance that a real premonition win with 30 coins will be selected, a 5% chance that a direct win with 50 coins will be selected, a 5% chance that a real premonition win with 50 coins will be selected, a 10% chance that a false premonition win will be selected, and a 70% chance that it will be a miss.

As described above, the lower the index value IV is in the winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), the higher the probability of an additional win. Also, the lower the index value IV is in the winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), the higher the expected value of the additional award number. Also, the lower the index value IV is in the winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), the higher the probability of a false premonition state win. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13).

If a direct win is selected in the top-up lottery process (step S1103) (step S1104: YES), the value of the number of awards selected as a direct win in this top-up lottery process (step S1103) is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S1105). After that, a direct win command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1106). The direct win command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a direct win has occurred in the top-up lottery process (step S1103) and the number of awards in that direct win. When the production side MPU 92 receives a direct win command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to display an indication that an addition has been made to the remaining number of awards of gaming media in the AT state ST5.

If the winning of this premonition state is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1107: YES), the value of the number of awards selected as the winning of this premonition state in this additional lottery process (step S1103) is added to the planned number counter 74f (see Figure 9) provided in the master RAM 74 (step S1108). The planned number counter 74f is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of awards to be added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the waiting game number in this premonition state.

Then, it is determined whether the real premonition flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1109). The real premonition flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the current state is a real premonition state. If the real premonition flag is not set to "1" (step S1109: NO), it is determined whether the false premonition flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1110). The false premonition flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the current state is a false premonition state. If the false premonition flag is not set to "1" (step S1110: NO), "10" is set in the standby counter 74g (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 as a value corresponding to the number of standby games for which the real premonition state will continue (step S1111). The standby counter 74g is a counter for the main MPU 72 to identify the remaining number of standby games when the real premonition state or the false premonition state is in effect.

When the player is already in the premonition state and the role selection process (Fig. 13) selects one of the index values IV = 11 to 15, an additional selection process is executed. If the additional selection process results in a direct win, the number of awards selected as the direct win is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, even if the player is in the middle of the premonition state.

If the winning of the main premonition state is determined by the additional lottery process executed in a situation where the main premonition state is already in the main premonition state, the number of awards selected as the winning of the main premonition state is added to the scheduled number counter 74f of the main RAM 74, so that when the current main premonition state ends, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f after the addition is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In other words, if the winning of the main premonition state is determined in the middle of the main premonition state, the number of awards added to the AT continuation counter 74e when the current main premonition state ends increases by the number of awards selected in the newly won main premonition state. However, even if the winning of the main premonition state is newly determined, if the main premonition flag of the main RAM 74 is already set to "1", the number of waiting games is not set to the waiting counter 74g in step S1111 by making a positive judgment in step S1109. Therefore, even if the winning of the main premonition state is determined in the additional lottery process in the middle of the main premonition state, the number of waiting games in the main premonition state is not extended. This will make it possible to prevent this precursor state from continuing excessively.

If the real premonition state is won in the additional lottery process executed in a situation where the false premonition state is already in a false premonition state, the number of awards selected as the winning of the real premonition state is added to the scheduled number counter 74f of the main RAM 74, so that the false premonition state is promoted to the real premonition state in the middle. Then, when the real premonition state after the promotion ends, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. However, even if the real premonition state is won in the middle of the false premonition state, if the false premonition flag of the main RAM 74 is already set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S1110, and the number of waiting games is not set to the waiting counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the real premonition state is won in the additional lottery process in the middle of the false premonition state, the real premonition state after the promotion ends when the remaining waiting games of the false premonition state before the promotion are consumed. This makes it possible to prevent the false premonition state and the real premonition state from continuing excessively.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1109, if a positive judgment is made in step S1110, or if the processing of step S1111 is executed, a real premonition command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1112). The real premonition command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a real premonition state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) and the number of awards for the real premonition state. When the production side MPU 92 receives the real premonition command, it causes the performance corresponding to the real premonition state to be executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. After that, the real premonition flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the false premonition flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1113).

If the winning of the false premonition state is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1114: YES), it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1115). If the value of the standby counter 74g is "0" (step S1115: NO), "10" is set to the standby counter 74g as a value corresponding to the number of standby games for which the false premonition state will continue (step S1116). Then, a false premonition command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1117). The false premonition command is a command for making the performance side MPU 92 recognize that the false premonition state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the false premonition command, it causes the performance corresponding to the false premonition state to be executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the false sign flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1118).

On the other hand, even if the false premonition state is won, if the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more (step S1115: YES), the process to start the false premonition state in steps S1116 to S1118 is not executed. Therefore, even if the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) when the real premonition state or false premonition state is already in effect, a new false premonition state is not set, and the number of standby games for the real premonition state or false premonition state that is currently in progress is not increased. This makes it possible to prevent the premonition state from continuing excessively.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the AT processing executed by the main MPU 72. The AT processing is executed in step S606 in the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the AT processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1201). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1201: NO), the processing from step S1202 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of awards in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and further, if a real premonition state or a false premonition state occurs in the AT state ST5, the number of waiting games for that premonition state is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the AT processing (Figure 25) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state starts in the middle of the AT state ST5, the number of games played in the CB state is not treated as the number of games played in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the AT state transitions to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, after the CB state ends, the AT state ST5 will resume from the state of the remaining number of awards immediately before the transition to the CB state.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1201: YES), it is determined whether a small win has been achieved in the current game and a number of game media greater than the number of bets "3" has been awarded (step S1202). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the first bell win, the second bell win, the first watermelon win, and the second watermelon win has been awarded. If a positive determination is made in step S1202, a subtraction process is executed on the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, provided that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more (step S1203: YES). In this subtraction process, the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the number of game media awarded in the current game, and the value after the subtraction is subtracted from the AT continuation counter 74e.

Note that, without being limited to the above configuration, when game media is awarded when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, the number of awards itself may be subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e without subtracting the number of bets. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total number of game media paid out is equal to or greater than the termination reference number. In addition, if the award of game media exceeding the number of bets or a replay win is not established, the number of game media of the player that was reduced by the execution of the game may be added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total net increase in the number of game media is equal to or greater than the termination reference number.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1202, if a negative judgment is made in step S1203, or if the processing of step S1204 is executed, and the value of the standby counter 74g in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1205: YES), the value of the standby counter 74g is decremented by 1 (step S1206). Then, if the value of the standby counter 74g after the decrement is "0" (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether the main sign flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1208).

If the present premonition flag is set to "1" (step S1208: YES), it means that the premonition state that is ending this time is the present premonition state. In this case, an addition process of the remaining number of awards is executed (step S1209). In this addition process, the value set in the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. As a result, when the final game of the present premonition state ends, the number of awards of gaming media that were the subject of award in the present premonition state is added to the remaining number of awards of gaming media in the AT state ST5.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1208 or if the processing of step S1209 is executed, the real precursor flag and the false precursor flag in the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0" (step S1210). As a result, if the current state is a real precursor state, the real precursor state ends, and if the current state is a false precursor state, the false precursor state ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1205, if a negative judgment is made in step S1207, or if the processing of step S1210 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S1211: YES), this means that the remaining number of game media awarded in the current AT state ST5 has become "0". In this case, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 74g in the main RAM 74 is "0" or not to determine whether the current state is a real precursor state or a false precursor state (step S1212).

If the current state is neither a real premonition state nor a false premonition state, and the value of the standby counter 74g of the master RAM 74 is "0" (step S1212: YES), a process for setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1213). In this process, the AT state flag of the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In this process, the end preparation state flag of the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the state is in the end preparation state ST6, and setting the end preparation state flag to "1" changes the game state to the end preparation state ST6. After that, the end preparation complete flag of the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1214). As already explained, the end preparation complete flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify whether or not one game has been played in the end preparation state ST6.

As already explained, in the end preparation state ST6, if a positive judgment is made in step S802 in the second control process for the game section (FIG. 21) and the end preparation complete flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" and then processing is executed to determine whether the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met, and the second control process for the game section in the current game (FIG. 21) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing is executed to terminate the second section SC2 and transition to the first section SC1 (steps S814 to S816). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 has ended ends.

Then, an AT end command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1215). The AT end command is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, it controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 so that a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed, and then a presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started.

On the other hand, if the current state is the real premonition state or the false premonition state and the value of the standby counter 74g of the master RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1212: NO), even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" and the remaining number of game media awarded in the current AT state ST5 is "0", the process to end the AT state ST5 in steps S1213 to S1215 is not executed. As a result, even if the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", if it is the real premonition state or the false premonition state, the AT state ST5 continues without ending. If it is the real premonition state, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f of the master RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the real premonition state, so that the AT state ST5 continues even after the real premonition state ends. If the player is in a false premonition state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is not incremented in the final game of the false premonition state. However, if a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) during the false premonition state, the number of selected awards is incremented to the AT continuation counter 74e, so the AT state ST5 can continue even after the false premonition state ends.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the performance control process for AT executed by the performance side MPU 92. The performance control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., 4 millisecond cycle).

If an AT transition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1301: YES), the AT base table pre-stored in the performance side ROM 93 is read into the performance side RAM 94 (step S1302). The performance execution control is performed according to the AT base table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light emission performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5, the speaker 62 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5, and the image display device 63 produces a display performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5.

Figure 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the base presentation of the AT state ST5 in the image display device 63. As shown in Figure 27 (a), in the base presentation for the AT state ST5, a moving image of the base image G11 is displayed by a base character image. In addition, a remaining number display image G12 is displayed to notify the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5, and an acquired number display image G13 is displayed to notify the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5. The presentation side MPU 92 is capable of grasping the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 and the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 based on commands received from the main side MPU 72, and appropriately updates the display contents of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 according to the grasped information.

If a direct hit winning command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1303: YES), the number of awards in the current direct hit winning is determined from the information contained in the direct hit winning command (step S1304), and the direct hit winning table corresponding to the determined number of awards is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1305). By controlling the execution of the performance according to the direct hit winning table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission performance corresponding to the direct hit winning, the speaker 62 performs a sound output performance corresponding to the direct hit winning in the AT state ST5, and the image display device 63 performs a display performance corresponding to the direct hit winning. In this case, the image display device 63 displays an image to notify the number of awards in the current direct hit winning, superimposed on a part of the base performance of the AT state ST5, and after the display, the number of awards is added to the number in the remaining award number display image G12. The remaining award number display image G12 displays the number resulting from adding the number of awards in the current direct hit winning to the remaining number of awards up to that point. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of prizes has increased due to a direct hit.

Here, even if a direct win occurs during the actual premonition state or the false premonition state, in the game in which that direct win occurs, the image display device 63 displays an image superimposed on part of the presentation of the actual premonition state or the false premonition state to notify the player of the number of prizes awarded in this direct win, and after this display is made, a display is made in which the number of prizes awarded is added to the number in the remaining prize number display image G12. Therefore, the player can understand that the remaining number of prizes has increased due to the direct win, even if the player is in the middle of the actual premonition state or the false premonition state.

If a false premonition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1306: YES), the false premonition table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1307). The performance execution control is performed according to the false premonition table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light emission performance corresponding to the false premonition state, the speaker 62 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the false premonition state, and the image display device 63 produces a display performance corresponding to the false premonition state.

27(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the false premonition state or the real premonition state in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 27(b), in the display effect corresponding to the false premonition state or the real premonition state, the remaining number of awarded items display image G12 and the number of acquired items display image G13 are displayed in the same manner as the base effect for the AT state ST5. In addition, in the display effect corresponding to the false premonition state or the real premonition state, a moving image of the premonition effect image G14 is displayed by the premonition effect character image. In the premonition effect image G14, an effect with a high expectation of an increase in the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is easily executed. In addition, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side of the false premonition state or the real premonition state. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game, an effect in which the same character is displayed between multiple games or an effect according to a series of stories may be executed. In addition, in the final game of the false premonition state, an image is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 will not increase. In the situation shown in FIG. 27(b), the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the middle of the false premonition state, so the remaining number of awards display image G12 shows "0 remaining," but since the false premonition state is in the middle of the state, the AT state ST5 continues without ending.

If the main premonition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1308: YES), the number of prizes selected due to the main premonition state winning that triggered the transmission of this main premonition command is determined from the information contained in the main premonition command, and the determined planned number is added to the planned prize number counter provided in the performance RAM 94 (step S1309). After that, it is determined whether the current performance is in progress for the main premonition state or the false premonition state (step S1310).

If the performance of the real premonition state or the false premonition state is not being executed (step S1310: NO), the real premonition table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1311). By controlling the execution of the performance according to the real premonition table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light-emitting performance corresponding to the real premonition state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output performance corresponding to the real premonition state, and the image display device 63 performs a display performance corresponding to the real premonition state. The content of the display performance of the image display device 63 corresponding to the real premonition state is the same as the content of the display performance corresponding to the false premonition state except for the final game, and the remaining award number display image G12, the acquisition number display image G13, and the premonition performance image G14 are displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 27(b). In the final game of the real premonition state, an image for notifying the number of awards corresponding to the value of the planned award number counter in the performance side RAM 94 is displayed, and after the display, the number of awards is added to the number in the remaining award number display image G12. The remaining number of awards display image G12 shows the number of awards remaining up to that point plus the number of awards at the end of this premonition state. This allows the player to understand that the remaining number of awards has increased due to this premonition state.

If the performance of the real premonition state or the false premonition state is being executed (step S1310: YES), a correction process is executed (step S1312). In the correction process, if the current state is in the middle of the false premonition state, the data corresponding to the performance of the final game in the false premonition table read into the performance side RAM 94 is changed to data that enables the execution of a performance corresponding to an increase in the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 and enables the notification of the number of awards corresponding to the value of the award constant counter in the performance side RAM 94. Also, if the current state is in the middle of the real premonition state, the data corresponding to the performance of the final game in the real premonition table read into the performance side RAM 94 is changed to data that enables the notification of the number of awards corresponding to the value of the award constant counter in the performance side RAM 94 after the addition in step S1309.

As already explained, even if the real premonition state is won during the false premonition state or the real premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g of the master RAM 74 is not changed, so the number of remaining standby games in the current premonition state is not changed, and after the real premonition state is won, the remaining number of standby games is consumed and the real premonition state ends. Therefore, even if the real premonition state is won during the false premonition state or the real premonition state, the performance MPU 92 only modifies the data of the final game in the premonition table for executing the performance corresponding to the current premonition state, and does not perform processing to increase the number of games in which the performance corresponding to the premonition state is executed. This makes it possible for the master MPU 72 to notify the player of the number of awards to be added in a game in which the value of the scheduled number counter 74f of the master RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the master RAM 74.

If an AT end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1313: YES), the AT end table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S1314). The performance execution control is performed according to the AT end table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light emission performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, the speaker 62 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, and the image display device 63 produces a display performance corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5.

Figure 27 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the end of AT state ST5 on the image display device 63. As shown in Figure 27 (c), in the display effect corresponding to the end of AT state ST5, a moving image of an end image G15 using an end character image is displayed. In addition, a text image G16 saying "END" is displayed to clearly indicate that the AT state ST5 has ended, and a total number of game media image G17 is displayed to notify the total number of game media acquired in this AT state ST5.

In the AT presentation control process (Figure 26), in addition to the above processes, other processes are also executed (step S1315). In the other processes, data to be referenced in various tables is updated as the game progresses, and the presentation content is updated. In addition, when game media is awarded, a process is executed to update the display content of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquisition number display image G13 accordingly. In addition, when a first ending command or a second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process is executed to perform an ending presentation.

Next, the progress of the presentation corresponding to the premonition state will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 28. Figure 28(a) shows the period in AT state ST5, Figure 28(b) shows the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74, Figure 28(c) shows the value of the standby counter 74g in the main RAM 74, Figure 28(d) shows the timing of a direct win in the additional lottery process (step S1103), Figure 28(e) shows the period in the real premonition state, and Figure 28(f) shows the period in the false premonition state.

First, we will explain the case where the AT state ST5 ends when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" during the false precursor state and the false precursor state ends.

At timing t1, the AT state ST5 starts as shown in FIG. 28(a). In this case, the AT continuation counter 74e is set to "200", which is the initial number of awards in the AT state ST5, as shown in FIG. 28(b). In the AT state ST5, the game is repeatedly executed, and the number of game media awarded in the game exceeds the number of bets, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t2, a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) as shown in FIG. 28(d). Therefore, at the timing of t2, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at timing t3, the main premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the main premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(e), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the main premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, as the game is played in the main premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at timing t4, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the number of grants set in the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 when the premonition state starts is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t5, the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the false premonition state starts as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, the game is executed and the number of game media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, as the game is executed in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c). After that, at the timing of t6, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). In the false premonition state, the number of awards is not added, so the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at timing t7, the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the false premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, as a game is played in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at the timing of t8 in the middle of the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t8, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state is in the middle, so even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without ending. After that, at the timing of t9, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). Since the number of additions does not occur in the false precursor state, the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, at the timing of t9, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is already "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, at the timing of t9, the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, we will explain the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false premonition state and a direct win occurs in the middle of the false premonition state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) at timing t10 in AT state ST5, the false premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Also, when a game is played in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at timing t11, which is in the middle of the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at timing t11, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more and the false precursor state is in the middle, so even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without ending.

After that, at timing t12 in the middle of the false premonition state, a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) as shown in FIG. 28(d). Therefore, at timing t12, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the number of awards selected in the direct win is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more, a game is played in the false premonition state and gaming media is awarded in excess of the number of bets, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is decremented as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). In the false premonition state, the number of granted points is not added, so the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t13, the number of granted points increased at the timing of t12 does not become "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), so the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more. Therefore, even if the false premonition state ends, the AT state ST5 continues. After that, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 28(b), and the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, we will explain the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false premonition state and the main premonition state is won in the middle of the false premonition state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the false premonition state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) at timing t15 in AT state ST5, the false premonition state begins as shown in FIG. 28(f), and the standby counter 74g is set to "10" corresponding to the number of standby games as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false premonition state, a game is played and gaming media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, so that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Furthermore, when a game is played in the false premonition state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at timing t16 in the middle of the false precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at timing t16, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more and the false precursor state is in the middle, so even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without ending.

After that, at timing t17, which is in the middle of the false premonition state, the additional lottery process (step S1103) results in a win to the real premonition state, and the false premonition state is promoted to the real premonition state, as shown in Figures 28(e) and 28(f). However, as shown in Figure 28(c), the number of waiting games is not reset in the waiting counter 74g, and the remaining number of waiting games is carried over as is.

At the timing of t18, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the premonition state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, when the premonition state starts, the number of grants set in the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases as shown in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, even if the premonition state ends, the AT state ST5 continues. After that, at the timing of t19, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), and the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the AT state ST5 is in a real premonition state or a false premonition state, the AT state ST5 continues without ending even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0", i.e., the number of remaining awarded game media in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". This makes it possible to create a situation in which the AT state ST5 can continue even if the number of remaining awarded game media in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". It also makes it possible to prevent the execution of the performance in the real premonition state or the false premonition state from ending midway due to the end of the AT state ST5.

In particular, in the case of a false premonition state that does not trigger an increase in the remaining number of granted gaming media in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 continues without terminating even if the remaining number of granted gaming media in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". This makes it possible to turn a false premonition state, which only serves as a presentation that does not affect the player's profits when the remaining number of granted gaming media is not "0", into a state for continuing the AT state ST5 when the remaining number of granted gaming media is "0", making it possible to increase the player's attention to the false premonition state.

If the AT state ST5 continues even if the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0" due to the false premonition state, the AT state ST5 will also end if the false premonition state ends with the remaining number remaining at "0". This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing excessively.

If a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the AT state ST5 will increase, and the player will hope that a direct win will occur in the AT state ST5. In this case, if the AT state ST5 continues even if the remaining number of awards is "0" due to the false premonition state, the remaining number of awards will increase if a direct win occurs in this continued situation. This makes it possible for the player to hope for a direct win even in a situation in which the AT state ST5 continues due to the false premonition state.

Even if a real premonition or false premonition win occurs during a real premonition or false premonition state, the number of remaining games in the premonition state will remain the same and will not increase. This makes it possible to prevent the false premonition state from continuing excessively.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the replay winning mode and the game content in the pseudo bonus state ST4 are different from those of the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Figure 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combinations of symbols that result in a normal replay win, a first special replay win, and a second special replay win.

As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern on the main line ML, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern on the main line ML, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern on the main line ML, If the stopping pattern on the M is a "replay" pattern and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" pattern and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, or if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, then a replay will usually be won.

In this embodiment, in addition to the normal replay win, the first chance replay win, and the second chance replay win, the first special replay win and the second special replay win are set as replay wins. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, the first special replay win is made. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "BAR" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, the second special replay win is made.

In this slot machine 10, as in the first embodiment, when the slot machine is in a non-CB state, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to easily achieve a winning combination corresponding to a winning role, and it is possible to prevent a winning combination corresponding to a non-winning role from being achieved. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, if five or more symbols exist among the constituent symbols that constitute the combination of symbols for achieving a winning role on one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44. The first special replay win and the second special replay win are winning modes that may not be achieved depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role selection table when betting three coins in this embodiment, which is selected when the setting value is "3" and the number of bets is "3". Note that in the following explanation, the explanatory diagram in Figure 31 will be referred to as appropriate.

The index values IV=1 to 16 are set with the same winning data and point value PV as those in the role selection table (FIG. 14) when three coins are bet in the first embodiment described above. Also, the index value IV=19 is set with the same winning data and point value PV as those in the index value IV=17 in the role selection table (FIG. 14) when three coins are bet in the first embodiment described above.

Normal replay winning data and first special replay winning data are set for index value IV=17. When a win occurs with index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 31, if the first stop is the left reel 32L or the center reel 32M, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. On the other hand, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, either the first special replay winning or the normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, if the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 relative to the rotational position of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is such that the first special replay win can be achieved, the first special replay win is prioritized, and if the operation timing is such that the first special replay win cannot be achieved, a regular replay win is achieved.

Index value IV=18 is set with normal replay winning data, first special replay winning data, and second special replay winning data. When index value IV=18 is won, as shown in FIG. 31, if the first stop is the left reel 32L or the center reel 32M, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, any of the first special replay winning, second special replay winning, and normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, if the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 relative to the rotational position of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is such that a first special replay win can be achieved, the first special replay win is prioritized, if the operation timing is such that a second special replay win can be achieved, the second special replay win is prioritized, and if the operation timing is such that neither the first nor second special replay win can be achieved, a normal replay win is achieved.

Here, the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this embodiment is the same as the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the first embodiment shown in Figure 4. In the configuration in which the right reel 32R needs to be stopped as the first stop in order to establish the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning when the index value IV = 18 is won as described above, there are more symbols than four symbols, which is the number of symbols for the maximum number of slips, between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R as shown in Figure 4. Therefore, when the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to establish the first special replay winning when the index value IV = 18 is won, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay winning will not be established because the "BAR" symbol does not stop. Also, when the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to establish the second special replay winning when the index value IV=18 is hit, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay winning will not be established because the "red 7" symbol will not stop. In other words, when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time in the case of a win of the index value IV=18, in a configuration in which the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning are prioritized over the normal replay winning, the priority between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning is not set in the stop control, and it is possible to select which of the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning will be established depending on the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player.

As shown in FIG. 30, the point value PV for index value IV=17 is set to "600", and the point value PV for index value IV=18 is set to "200", so the probability of winning with index value IV=17 is approximately 1/109, and the probability of winning with index value IV=18 is approximately 1/328. In other words, the index value IV=18, which can result in both the first special replay win and the second special replay win, has a lower probability of winning than the index value IV=17, which can result in only the first special replay win of the first and second special replay wins.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the role in the pseudo bonus state ST4, a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the first special replay prize. Also, in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), if the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the state, a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the first special replay prize, and if the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the state, a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the second special replay prize. These notifications will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 32(b). FIG. 32(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the first special replay prize, and FIG. 32(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which a notification is made on the main line ML to encourage the establishment of the second special replay prize. The first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 refers to the situation up until half of the initial number of continuing games (20 or 50 games) when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started has been played, and the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 refers to the situation after half of the initial number of continuing games has been played.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, when the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process for the role (Fig. 13), or when the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process for the role (Fig. 13) in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the image display device 63 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, as shown in Fig. 32 (a1), and displays a message indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, the dual-use display unit 66 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, as shown in Fig. 32 (a2). Then, by stopping the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order indicated by the notification and operating the stop buttons 42-44 on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to aim for the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 32(a3).

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 17 is won, or in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV = 18 is won, it is determined that the AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is stopped first, and a notification is made on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 32 (a3). This makes it possible to notify the player that a transition to AT state ST5 has been confirmed by using the stopping results of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV=16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, wins in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time with a predetermined probability (e.g., 20%), and a notification is made to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, even if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R up to the second stop, but the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the third stop. This makes it possible to use notifications such as those mentioned above that encourage players to aim for the "red 7" symbol to create an effect that creates anticipation of a transition to AT state ST5.

When the index value IV = 17 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or when the index value IV = 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and a notification to aim for the "red 7" symbol as described above occurs, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not stopped in the order according to the notification, or if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated at the timing when the "red 7" symbol stops on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "red 7" symbol, the combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are not displayed on the main line ML, and a normal replay win is established. However, even in this case, the AT state ST5 is entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the benefit of the transition to the AT state ST5 from being lost due to the player's stop operation mode.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the image display device 63 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, as shown in FIG. 32(b1), and displays a message indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, the dual-use display unit 66 displays a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, as shown in FIG. 32(b2). Then, by stopping the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification and operating stop buttons 42-44 on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to aim for the "BAR" symbol, a combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols, and "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 32(b3).

If an index value IV = 18 is won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it is confirmed that the AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, and the AT state ST5 will be entered, which is more advantageous than when an index value IV = 17 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and when an index value IV = 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. Specifically, the initial number of points awarded in the AT state ST5 will be greater than when the AT state ST5 is entered under other conditions. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is stopped first and a notification is given to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification and operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a combination of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol is displayed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 32(b3). This makes it possible to notify the player that a transition to the more advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed by utilizing the stopping results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV=16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, wins in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%), and a notification is made to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, even if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "BAR" symbol will stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R up to the second stop, but the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the third stop. This makes it possible to use notifications such as those mentioned above that encourage players to aim for the "BAR" symbol to create an effect that encourages players to look forward to a transition to the more favorable AT state ST5.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won and a notification to aim for the "BAR" symbol is generated as described above, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not stopped in the order according to the notification, or if the stop buttons 42-44 are not operated at the timing when the "BAR" symbol stops on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are not displayed on the main line ML, and a normal replay win is established. However, even in this case, the more advantageous AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the benefit of the transition to the more advantageous AT state ST5 from being lost due to the player's stop operation mode.

Here, the first special replay winning data is set at index value IV=17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set at index value IV=18. In the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if index value IV=17 or 18 is won, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. On the other hand, in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if index value IV=18 is won, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. This makes it possible to increase the probability that a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol and a "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 by utilizing the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol and a "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

When index value IV = 17 is hit, if the right reel 32R is stopped first and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols will be displayed stationary on the main line ML even in a gaming state other than pseudo bonus state ST4. Even if the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML in a gaming state other than pseudo bonus state ST4, the player will not be awarded any benefits other than the opportunity to play again. In this case, in a configuration in which the first special replay winning data is not set at index value IV=18, if one wishes to maintain the same probability of the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols being displayed stopped on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it becomes necessary to increase the winning probability of index value IV=17. However, if the winning probability of index value IV=17 is increased, then the probability that the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed stopped on the main line ML in a game state that is not pseudo bonus state ST4 will increase accordingly. In response to this, by setting not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data to index value IV=18 as described above, and by making a notification to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML when index value IV=18 is won in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to set the probability that the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4 to a predetermined probability while preventing the winning probability of index value IV=17 from becoming too high.

As already explained, there are more than four symbols between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, which is the maximum number of symbols that can be slipped. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won and the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to win the first special replay, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the "BAR" symbol will not stop, resulting in the second special replay winning. Also, when the index value IV=18 is won and the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to win the second special replay winning, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the "red 7" symbol will not stop, resulting in the first special replay winning. In other words, in a configuration in which, when index value IV = 18 is won and right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning are given priority over normal replay winning, no priority is set between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning in this stopping control, and it is possible to select whether the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning will be achieved depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 42-44 by the player. As a result, when index value IV=18 is hit, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4, and a notification is made to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of pseudo bonus state ST4, making it possible to stop a combination of symbols suitable for each situation on the main line ML in a configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to index value IV=18.

Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the stop order notification control process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. The stop order notification control process is executed in step S412 in the role selection process (Figure 13).

First, it is determined whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" to determine whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1401). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401: NO), the processing from step S1402 onwards is not executed. If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1401: YES), and if the current game state is AT state ST5 (step S1402: YES), notification control processing for an advantageous state is executed (step S1403). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if the index value IV = 1 to 6 is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13), a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to display the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win on the image display device 63. In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if the index value IV = 7 to 9 is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13), a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell win is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to display the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell win on the image display device 63.

If the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), and if the index value IV = 17 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S1405: YES), the display data setting process for the right first stop is executed (step S1406). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This display is started before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled, and is ended when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Then, a red 7 notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1407). FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the notification control process executed by the production side MPU 92. The notification control process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds). When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command (step S1501: YES), it reads the red 7 notification table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1502). As a result, the image display device 63 starts to display a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a display indicating that the "red 7" pattern should be aimed for on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. This display begins before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES) and the index value IV=18 has been won in the role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S1408: YES), it is determined whether the current state is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1409). As already explained, the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 refers to the state until half of the initial number of continuing games (20 or 50 games) when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started has been played, and the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 refers to the state after half of the initial number of continuing games has been played.

If it is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1409: YES), a process for setting display data for the right first stop is executed (step S1410). As a result, a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This display is started before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and is ended when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Then, a command for the red 7 notification is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1411). As already explained, when the production side MPU 92 receives the command for the red 7 notification, it causes the image display device 63 to start a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a display indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

If it is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1409: NO), a process for setting display data for the right first stop is executed (step S1412). As a result, a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This display is started before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and is ended when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Then, the production side MPU 92 transmits a BAR notification command (step S1413). When the production side MPU 92 receives a BAR notification command in the notification control process (FIG. 34) (step S1503: YES), it reads the BAR notification table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1504). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a display indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started on the image display device 63. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled, and ends when a stop command is issued for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES) and neither index value IV = 17 nor 18 is selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13) (step S1408: NO), other processing is executed (step S1414). In other processing, if any of index values IV = 1 to 6 is selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13), a display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the image display device 63 of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won. In other processes, if the index value IV = 7 to 9 is selected in the role selection process (Figure 13), a display corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the image display device 63 of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won.

In other processes, when the index value IV=16, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, wins in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the notification lottery process is executed, and when the notification lottery process results in a "Red 7" notification win (the winning probability is, for example, 20%), a command for the notification of Red 7 is sent to the production side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the command for the notification of Red 7, as already explained, the image display device 63 starts a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type, and a display indicating that the "Red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled, and ends when a stop command is issued for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. In this case, the process of setting the display data for the right first stop is not executed, and the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are any type of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not performed on the combined display unit 66.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=16, in which only normal replay winning data is set, is selected in the role selection process (FIG. 13), a notification selection process is executed, and if the notification selection process results in a "BAR" notification win (with a winning probability of, for example, 10%), a BAR notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92. As already explained, when the production side MPU 92 receives the BAR notification command, it starts the image display device 63 to display a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a display indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" pattern on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This display starts before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed. In this case, the process of setting the display data for the right first stop is not executed, and the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop targets are of any type is not performed on the combined display unit 66.

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. The pseudo bonus processing is executed in step S605 of the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18).

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1601). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1601: NO), the processing from step S1602 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus process (Figure 35) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of games played in the CB state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the CB state is transitioned to in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, after the CB state ends, the pseudo bonus state ST4 will resume from the state of the remaining number of continued games immediately before transitioning to the CB state.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1601: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1602). Then, in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the role in the current game, it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 17 is won (step S1603). If the index value IV = 17 is won (step S1603: YES), the value of the transition advantageous counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1604). The transition advantageous counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, and, if the AT state ST5 is transitioned to, to specify the degree of advantage of the AT state ST5. The transition advantageous counter is cleared to "0" when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is transitioned to. In addition, in step S1604, the value of the transition advantageous counter is incremented by 1, and the larger the value of the transition advantageous counter, the larger the initial number of AT states ST5 that will be awarded after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. Therefore, the more times the index value IV=17 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the more likely a favorable AT state ST5 will occur thereafter.

Then, a first advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the increment is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1605). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first advantageous generation command in the production control process (FIG. 34), it reads a table corresponding to the information of the first advantageous generation command from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 in other processes (step S1513). As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "1" after the increment of 1, a performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after the increment of 1, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 35), if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 13) (step S1606: YES), and if the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1607: NO), the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1608). If the transition advantageous counter value is "0" and 1 is incremented in step S1608, the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed, and if the transition advantageous counter value is 1 or greater and 1 is incremented in step S1608, the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become even more advantageous.

Then, a first advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the increment is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1609). When the production side MPU 92 receives the first advantageous generation command in the production control process (FIG. 34), it reads a table corresponding to the information of the first advantageous generation command from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 in other processes (step S1513). As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "1" after the increment of 1, a performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after the increment of 1, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 35), if the index value IV=18 has been won in the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 13) (step S1606: YES) and the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1607: YES), the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 2 (step S1610). If the transition advantageous counter value is "0" and 2 is incremented in step S1610, a transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed, and if the transition advantageous counter value is 1 or greater and 2 is incremented in step S1610, the AT state ST5 to which a transition has already been confirmed has become even more advantageous.

Then, a second advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 2 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the increment of 2 is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1611). When the production side MPU 92 receives the second advantageous generation command in the production control process (FIG. 34), it reads a table corresponding to the information of the second advantageous generation command from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 in other processes (step S1513). As a result, if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes "2" after the increment of 2, a performance indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition advantageous counter becomes 3 or more after the increment of 2, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

When the processing of step S1605 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S1606, when the processing of step S1609 is executed, or when the processing of step S1611 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1612). When the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1612: YES), it is determined whether the value of the transition time advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1613).

If the value of the transition advantageous counter is 1 or more (step S1613: YES), it means that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1614). Then, a setting process is executed for the AT continuation counter 74e (step S1615). In the setting process, the initial grant number corresponding to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is selected, and the selected initial grant number is set in the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74. Specifically, if the value of the transition advantageous counter is "1", "200" is selected as the initial grant number, if the value of the transition advantageous counter is "2", "300" is selected as the initial grant number, if the value of the transition advantageous counter is "3", "400" is selected as the initial grant number, and so on. With "200" as the minimum value of the initial grant number, the initial grant number is increased by "100" each time the value of the transition advantageous counter increases by 1. As a result, the higher the value of the transition advantageous counter, the more advantageous the AT state ST5 that will occur.

Then, the AT state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1616). Then, an AT transition command indicating that a transition to AT state ST5 will occur is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1617). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance indicating that a transition to AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1613: NO), the setting process of the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1618). In this setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in this setting process, the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the end preparation state ST6 is in progress, and the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6 when the end preparation state flag is set to "1". In addition, the end preparation completion flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1619). In addition, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1620). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, it causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to perform a performance indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. The winning determination process is executed in step S512 of the reel control process (Figure 17).

If the first special replay win (a combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol stopped on the main line ML) is achieved in this game (step S1701: YES), and if the current state is pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1702: YES), a first special win command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1703). If the production side MPU 92 receives the first special win command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), it reads the first special win table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, a performance indicating that the first special replay win has been achieved, that is, a combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol stopped and displayed on the main line ML, is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63.

As already explained, when index value IV = 17 is won in pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of reels 32L, 32M, 32R, after the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, a first advantageous generation command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92 in step S1605 of the pseudo bonus processing (Figure 35), and based on that, if the value of the transition-time advantageous counter becomes "1" after adding 1, a presentation indicating that the transition to AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition-time advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after adding 1, a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In addition, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, a first advantageous generation command is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92 in step S1609 of the pseudo bonus processing (Figure 35), and based on that, if the value of the transition-time advantageous counter becomes "1" after adding 1, a performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the transition-time advantageous counter becomes 2 or more after adding 1, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In addition, if the index value IV=18 is hit in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a second advantageous generation command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92 in step S1611 of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 35) after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning. Based on this, if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes "2" after adding 2, a performance indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes 3 or more after adding 2, a performance indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In contrast, when the first special replay win is achieved in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as described above, a red 7 display indicating that a combination of a "red 7" symbol and a "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In this case, the red 7 display is executed before a display indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or a display indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable. After the red 7 display is executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), a display indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or a display indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is executed for a specific period (e.g., 10 seconds).

In addition, if index value IV = 17 is won in pseudo bonus state ST4 and the first stop is on the right reel 32R and a notification is issued on each of reels 32L, 32M, 32R indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, but the first special replay winning is not achieved, then a presentation indicating that the "red 7" symbol or a combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol were not stopped and displayed on the main line ML is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 5 seconds), and then a presentation indicating that a transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is displayed for a specific period of time (e.g. 10 seconds). In addition, if the index value IV=18 is hit in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, and a notification is issued on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, but the first special replay is not won, then a presentation indicating that the "red 7" symbol or a combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol was not stopped and displayed on the main line ML is presented for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), and then a presentation indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is presented for a specific period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of the winning judgment process (Figure 36), if a second special replay winning (a combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols stopped on the main line ML) is achieved in this game (step S1705: YES), and if the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1706: YES, step S1708: YES), a second special winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1709). If the production side MPU 92 receives the second special winning command in the production control process (Figure 34) (step S1507: YES), it reads the second special winning table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1508). As a result, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 display an effect indicating that the second special replay has been achieved, i.e., that the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and a combination of "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML.

As already explained, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of the stopping result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop spinning, a second advantageous generation command is sent from the main MPU 72 to the presentation side MPU 92 in step S1611 of the pseudo bonus processing (Figure 35), and based on that, if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes "2" after adding 2, a presentation indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and if the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition becomes 3 or more after adding 2, a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed as a transition, has become even more advantageous is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

In contrast, when the second special replay win is established in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as described above, a BAR establishment effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, indicating that the "BAR" symbol and a combination of "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, the BAR establishment effect is executed before the effect indicating that the transition to the favorable AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable. After the BAR establishment effect is executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), the effect indicating that the transition to the favorable AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more favorable is executed for a specific period (e.g., 10 seconds).

In addition, if the index value IV=18 is hit in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, and a notification is issued on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, but the second special replay is not won, a presentation indicating that the "BAR" symbol or a combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols is not displayed on the main line ML is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), and then a presentation indicating that the transition to the favorable AT state ST5 has been confirmed or a presentation indicating that the AT state ST5 has become even more favorable is displayed for a specific period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

Returning to the explanation of the winning judgment process (FIG. 36), if the first special replay winning is established in the current game (step S1701: YES) and the current state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1702: NO), the first irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1704). Also, if the second special replay winning is established in the current game (step S1705: YES) and the current state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1706: NO), the first irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1707). If the production side MPU 92 receives the first irregular command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1509: YES), it reads the first irregular table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1510). When the first irregular table is read, the speaker 62 outputs a first irregular notification sound that allows the player to recognize that a replay win has been achieved. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as it allows the player to recognize that a replay win has been achieved, but for example, a voice saying "It's a replay" is output.

Even if a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, the replay privilege is granted but no other benefits are granted other than the replay privilege. In this case, by outputting a first irregular notification sound when a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, it becomes possible to make the player aware that although a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, no other benefits are granted other than the replay privilege.

When the first irregular table is read, the speaker 62 outputs the first irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not issue a notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being too conspicuous.

Returning to the explanation of the winning judgment process (FIG. 36), if the second special replay winning is established in this game (step S1705: YES) and the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1706: YES, step S1708: NO), a second irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1710). If the production side MPU 92 receives the second irregular command in the production control process (FIG. 34) (step S1511: YES), it reads the second irregular table from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S1512). When the second irregular table is read, a second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62 as a notification sound that allows the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. The content of the notification sound can be arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when a "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are displayed stopped on the main line ML, but for example, a sound saying "It's the same as when a red 7 is formed" is output.

Even if the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol combination are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the replay privilege is granted and the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1, but the value of the transition advantageous counter is not incremented by 2. In this case, by outputting the second irregular notification sound when the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol combination are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to make the player recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol combination are displayed on the main line ML, only the same benefit as when the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "red 7" symbol combination are displayed on the main line ML is granted.

When the second irregular table is read, the speaker 62 outputs the second irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not issue a notification corresponding to the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being too conspicuous.

In addition to the various processes described above, the winning determination process (Figure 36) also executes other processes (step S1711). In these other processes, processes other than steps S1701 to S1710 that correspond to the winning result in the current game are executed.

Next, the operation contents when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is realized in each game state will be explained with reference to the time chart of Figure 37. Figure 37 (a) shows the execution period of one game, Figure 37 (b) shows the period in the pseudo bonus state ST4, Figure 37 (c) shows the period in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, Figure 37 (d) shows the timing when the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), Figure 37 (e) shows the timing when the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process for the role (Figure 13), Figure 37 (f) shows the period when the first stop is the right reel 32R and a notification (hereinafter referred to as the red 7 notification) indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is being made on the image display device 63, and Figure 37 (g) shows the period when the first stop is the right reel 32R. 37 shows a period during which the image display device 63 issues a notification (hereinafter referred to as BAR notification) indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, FIG. 37(h) shows the timing when the "red 7" symbol and a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, FIG. 37(i) shows the timing when the "BAR" symbol and a combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, FIG. 37(j) shows a period during which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, and FIG. 37(k) shows a period during which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62.

First, we will explain the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b) and FIG. 37(c), a new game is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(d), the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), so that the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 37(f). Then, in accordance with the red 7 notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, so that the first special replay win is established at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 will be entered after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends.

After that, at the timing of t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(e). Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 37(f). Then, in response to the red 7 notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the right reel 32R on the main line ML, thereby establishing the first special replay win as shown in FIG. 37(h) at the timing of t4. That is, the combination of the red 7, the red 7, and the red 7 is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that the AT state ST5, which has already been confirmed to have been transitioned to, has become more favorable.

After that, at the timing of t5, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13). Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 37(f). However, without following the red 7 notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the right reel 32R is stopped first, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, and the second special replay is won at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is displayed stopped on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(k), from timing t6 to timing t7, the speaker 62 outputs a sound saying "It's the same as getting a red 7." as the second irregular notification sound. This allows the player to recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, the combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, only the same benefit will be awarded as if the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols were stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

Next, we will explain the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b) and FIG. 37(c), a new game is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(e). Since the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the BAR notification is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 37(g). Then, in accordance with the BAR notification, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, thereby establishing the second special replay winning as shown in FIG. 37(i) at the timing of t9. That is, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that the more advantageous AT state ST5 will occur.

Next, we will explain what happens when the game is not in pseudo bonus state ST4.

In a situation that is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b), a new game is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(d). However, since the situation is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f). Although the red 7 notification is not being executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the right reel 32R on the main line ML, thereby establishing the first special replay winning as shown in FIG. 37(h) at the timing of t11. That is, the combination of the red 7 symbol, the red 7 symbol, and the red 7 symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(j), from timing t11 to timing t12, the speaker 62 outputs the first irregular notification sound "It's a replay." This allows the player to recognize that although the "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, no benefits other than the replay privilege will be awarded.

After that, in a situation that is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 37(b), a new game is started at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) as shown in FIG. 37(e). However, since it is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f), and the BAR notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(g). Although the BAR notification is not being executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop the right reel 32R on the main line ML, thereby establishing the second special replay winning at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(j), from timing t14 to timing t15, the speaker 62 outputs the first irregular notification sound "It's a replay." This allows the player to recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbols are displayed statically on the main line ML, no benefits other than the replay privilege will be awarded.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The first special replay winning data is set at index value IV = 17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set at index value IV = 18. In the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if index value IV = 17 or 18 is won, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. On the other hand, in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, if index value IV = 18 is won, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. This makes it possible to increase the probability that a combination of a "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol and a "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 by utilizing the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol and a "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

When index value IV = 17 is hit, if the right reel 32R is stopped first and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols will be displayed on the main line ML even in a gaming state other than pseudo bonus state ST4. Even if the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than pseudo bonus state ST4, the player will not be awarded any benefits other than the opportunity to play again. In this case, if one wishes to maintain the same probability that the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols will be displayed stopped on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation where the first special replay winning data is not set at index value IV=18, it becomes necessary to increase the winning probability of index value IV=17. However, if the winning probability of index value IV=17 is increased, the probability that the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols will be displayed stopped on the main line ML in a game state that is not pseudo bonus state ST4 will increase accordingly. In response to this, by setting not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data to index value IV=18 as described above, and by making a notification to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML when index value IV=18 is won in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to set the probability that the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol will be stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4 to a predetermined probability while preventing the winning probability of index value IV=17 from becoming too high.

On the right reel 32R, there are more than four symbols between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, which is the maximum number of symbols for the number of slips. Therefore, if the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to establish the first special replay prize when the index value IV = 18 is won, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the "BAR" symbol will not stop, resulting in the second special replay prize. Also, if the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R in order to establish the second special replay prize when the index value IV = 18 is won, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the "red 7" symbol will not stop, resulting in the first special replay prize. In other words, in a configuration in which, when index value IV = 18 is won and right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning are given priority over normal replay winning, no priority is set between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning in this stopping control, and it is possible to select whether the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning will be achieved depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 42-44 by the player. As a result, when index value IV=18 is hit, a notification is made to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML in the first half of pseudo bonus state ST4, and a notification is made to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol on the main line ML in the second half of pseudo bonus state ST4, making it possible to stop a combination of symbols suitable for each situation on the main line ML in a configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to index value IV=18.

Even if the index value IV = 17 or 18 is hit in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 and a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, a combination of "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols are statically displayed on the main line ML, the re-play privilege will be granted but no other benefits will be granted other than the re-play privilege. In this case, by outputting the first irregular notification sound when a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, "BAR" and "BAR" symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, it becomes possible to make the player aware that although a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, "BAR" and "BAR" symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the main line ML, no benefits other than the privilege of replay will be awarded.

In particular, the first irregular notification sound outputs the sound "It's a replay," indicating that a replay privilege has been granted. This allows the player to recognize that only the replay privilege has been granted, even if the index value IV = 17 or 18 is won in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, and a "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, a combination of "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML.

When the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time when the index value IV = 17 or 18 is hit in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, a combination of "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the first irregular notification sound is not output. This makes it possible to prevent the first irregular notification sound from being output excessively.

When the first irregular table is read, the speaker 62 outputs the first irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not execute a notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol being displayed stationary on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols, or a combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols, and "BAR" symbols being displayed stationary on the main line ML in a game state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being too conspicuous.

When the second special replay win is established in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the speaker 62 outputs a second irregular notification sound that allows the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when the "red 7" symbol, the combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when the "red 7" symbol, the combination of the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML, but for example, a voice saying "It's the same as when the red 7 is established" is output. Even if the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbol are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the replay privilege is awarded and the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is only incremented by 1, but the value of the transition advantageous counter is not incremented by 2. In this case, by outputting the second irregular notification sound when the "BAR" symbol or a combination of "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that although the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and a combination of "BAR" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, only the same benefit will be awarded as if the "red 7" symbol or a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols were displayed stationary on the main line ML.

When the second irregular table is read, the speaker 62 outputs the second irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not issue a notification corresponding to the "BAR" symbol, the combination of "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being too conspicuous.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the winning determination process is different from that of the second embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the second embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the second embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

When the second special replay win is established (step S1807: YES), the processing contents of steps S1808 to S1812 and the processing contents of other processing of step S1813 are the same as steps S1706 to S1711 of the winning determination process (Figure 36) in the second embodiment. Also, when the first special replay win is established in a situation other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the processing contents of step S1803 are the same as step S1704 of the winning determination process (Figure 36) in the second embodiment.

If the first special replay win (a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols stopped on the main line ML) is achieved in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, step S1802: YES), it is determined whether the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and whether the index value IV = 18 has been won in the lottery process for the role in this game (Figure 13) (step S1804). If the current situation is the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the index value IV = 17 has been won in the lottery process for the role in this game (Figure 13) (step S1804: NO), a first special win command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1805). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the first special establishment command in the presentation control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), it reads the first special establishment table from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, a presentation indicating that the first special replay winning has been established, that is, that the "red 7" symbol and the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

If the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the lottery process for the current game (FIG. 13) has resulted in the index value IV=18 (step S1804: YES), the first stop is on the right reel 32R, and even though a BAR notification is being made on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the right reel 32R is brought to a first stop and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, meaning that the first special replay win has been achieved, that is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, a third irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1806).

When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the third irregular command, it reads out the third irregular table from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94. When the third irregular table is read out, the speaker 62 outputs a third irregular notification sound, which allows the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when a combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as it allows the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as when a combination of a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, but for example, a voice saying "It's the same as when BAR is achieved" is output.

According to the above configuration, in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, even though the index value IV = 18 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13) and a BAR notification is made, if the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, thereby achieving the first special replay winning, i.e., if the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, a third irregular notification sound is output to enable the player to recognize that the same benefit has been awarded as if the combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols were displayed stationary on the main line ML. This allows the player to recognize that although the "red 7" symbol and the combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are displayed stationary on the main line ML, the player will be awarded the same benefit as if the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of "BAR" symbols were displayed stationary on the main line ML.

When the third irregular table is read out, the speaker 62 outputs the third irregular notification sound, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not issue a notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML, despite the index value IV=18 being won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the "red 7" symbol, the combination of "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols being stopped and displayed on the main line ML, despite the index value IV=18 being won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, from being too conspicuous.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the game content of the AT state ST5 is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the processing for the AT state at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the processing for the AT state at the start of the game is executed in step S904 in the processing for the advantageous state at the start of the game (Figure 22).

On the condition that neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1901: NO), the master MPU 72 determines whether the current state is in the add-on period by determining whether the value of the add-on period counter in the master RAM 74 is 1 or greater (step S1902). The add-on period is a period during which the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is more likely to increase than in a situation that is not in the add-on period in the AT state ST5. The add-on period counter is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine whether the current state is in the add-on period and, if it is, the remaining number of continuing games in the add-on period.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S1902: NO), on the condition that one of index values IV = 11 to 15 has been won in the lottery process for the role in this game (Figure 13) (step S1903: YES), a lottery process for transition to the add-on period is executed (step S1904). In the lottery process for transition to the add-on period, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition to the add-on period using a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 and an add-on transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73.

There are a first add-on period and a second add-on period. The second add-on period has a higher expected value for increasing the remaining number of gaming media awarded in the AT state ST5 than the first add-on period. Therefore, both the first add-on period and the second add-on period are more advantageous to the player than a situation in the AT state ST5 that is not a add-on period, but the second add-on period is even more advantageous to the player than the first add-on period.

Specifically, regarding the lottery process for transition to the add-on period, if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is an 8% probability of being selected to transition to the first add-on period, a 2% probability of being selected to transition to the second add-on period, and a 90% probability of being a miss. If the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 4% probability of being selected to transition to the first add-on period, a 1% probability of being selected to transition to the second add-on period, and a 95% probability of being a miss. If the index value IV=13 is selected, there is a 30% probability of being selected to transition to the first add-on period, a 10% probability of being selected to transition to the second add-on period, and a 60% probability of being a miss. If the index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 25% probability of being selected to transition to the first add-on period, a 5% probability of being selected to transition to the second add-on period, and a 70% probability of being a miss. If the index value IV = 15 is reached, there is an 8% chance of winning the transition to the first added-on period, a 2% chance of winning the transition to the second added-on period, and a 90% chance of losing.

If the lottery process for transition to the first added-on period results in a win for the transition to the first added-on period (step S1905: YES), the first added-on winning flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906). The first added-on winning flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that a win for the transition to the first added-on period has occurred. In addition, a winning command for the first added-on period is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1907). When the production side MPU 92 receives a winning command for the first added-on period, it causes a performance indicating that a win for the transition to the first added-on period has occurred to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

If the lottery process for transition to the second added-on period results in a win for the transition to the second added-on period (step S1905: NO, step S1908: YES), the second added-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1909). The second added-on winning flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that a win for the transition to the second added-on period has occurred. In addition, a winning command for the second added-on period is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1910). When the production side MPU 92 receives a winning command for the second added-on period, it causes a performance indicating that a win for the transition to the second added-on period has occurred to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

If the lottery process for transition to the added-on period is unsuccessful (step S1905: NO, step S1908: NO), other processing is executed (step S1911). In the other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1103 to S1118 of the AT state processing at the start of the game in the first embodiment (FIG. 24) is executed.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. The AT processing is executed in step S606 of the response processing at the end of play (Figure 18). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the AT processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the value of the bet number setting counter in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether the value of the add-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the current period is the first add-on period or the second add-on period (step S2002). If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is neither the first add-on period nor the second add-on period (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether either the first add-on winning flag or the second add-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003).

If either the first or second added-on winning flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), the added-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S2004). This starts the added-on period. Also, a start command for the added-on period is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2005). In this case, if the first added-on winning flag is set to "1", information indicating that it is the first added-on period is included in the start command for the added-on period, and if the second added-on winning flag is set to "1", information indicating that it is the second added-on period is included in the start command for the added-on period. When the performance side MPU 92 receives a start command for an added-on period that includes information about the first added-on period, the performance corresponding to the first added-on period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and when the performance side MPU 92 receives a start command for an added-on period that includes information about the second added-on period, the performance corresponding to the second added-on period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If the value of the top-up period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2002: NO), the value of the top-up period counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). Then, if the value of the top-up period counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2007: YES), the first top-up winning flag and the second top-up winning flag in the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0" (step S2008). In addition, a command to end the top-up period is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S2009). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the command to end the top-up period, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance corresponding to the end of the top-up period.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2003, if the processing of step S2005 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2007, or if the processing of step S2009 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2010). In other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1202 to S1215 of the AT processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed. In this case, if the value of the top-up period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, i.e., if it is the first top-up period or the second top-up period, the subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter 74e in step S1204 is not executed. As a result, the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is not reduced during the first top-up period or the second top-up period.

Returning to the explanation of the AT state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 39), if the value of the added-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or greater, i.e., if it is the first added-on period or the second added-on period (step S1902: YES), the added-on period processing is executed (step S1912). FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the added-on period processing.

If the second add-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), this means that the current add-on period is the first add-on period, so the lottery table for the first add-on period is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2102). On the other hand, if the second add-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), this means that the current add-on period is the second add-on period, so the lottery table for the second add-on period is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S2103).

When the processing of step S2102 or step S2103 is executed, an add-on lottery process for the add-on period is executed (step S2104). In this add-on lottery process, lottery numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the obtained lottery numerical information is compared against the lottery table read into the main RAM 74 in step S2102 or step S2103. In the add-on lottery process for the add-on period, there is no loss, and a number of 10 or more coins is selected.

Then, the number of points selected in the add-on lottery process for the add-on period (step S2104) is added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74 (step S2105). In addition, a command for the add-on period including information on the added number of points is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2106). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives a command during the add-on period, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize the newly added number of points.

Figure 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when the add-on lottery process for the add-on period (step S2104) is executed with reference to the lottery table for the first add-on period, and the selection manner of the number of points to be awarded when the add-on lottery process for the add-on period (step S2104) is executed with reference to the lottery table for the second add-on period.

As shown in FIG. 42, in each game during the first add-on period, there is a 25% probability that 10 coins will be awarded, a 25% probability that 20 coins will be awarded, a 10% probability that 30 coins will be awarded, a 10% probability that 40 coins will be awarded, a 10% probability that 50 coins will be awarded, a 10% probability that 60 coins will be awarded, a 5% probability that 80 coins will be awarded, and a 5% probability that 100 coins will be awarded. In this case, the lottery table for the first add-on period is set so that a larger number of coins will be selected for a game that has won an index value IV with a low winning probability in the role lottery process (FIG. 13). During the first add-on period, all of the selectable numbers of coins are multiples of "2".

As shown in FIG. 42, in each game during the second add-on period, 60 coins are selected with a 20% probability, 80 coins are selected with a 20% probability, 100 coins are selected with a 10% probability, 120 coins are selected with a 10% probability, 140 coins are selected with a 10% probability, 160 coins are selected with a 10% probability, 180 coins are selected with a 10% probability, and 200 coins are selected with a 10% probability. In this case, the lottery table for the second add-on period is set so that a larger number of coins is more likely to be selected in a game in which an index value IV with a low winning probability is selected in the role lottery process (FIG. 13). In the second add-on period, all of the numbers of coins that can be selected are multiples of "4". In addition, the expected value of the number of coins selected in each game and the expected value of the number of coins awarded throughout the add-on period are higher in the second add-on period than in the first add-on period.

Next, we will explain the execution content of the performance executed by the image display device 63 during the first and second added periods.

Figures 43(a) to 43(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution content of the performance executed by the image display device 63 during the first added-on period.

During the first top-up period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two parts, left and right, as shown in Figures 43(a) to 43(c). The two divided left and right areas A1 and A2 have approximately the same shape and size. In the left and right areas A1 and A2, animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the number of award notification display G23 are displayed, respectively, but the contents of these animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the number of award notification display G23 are the same in the left and right areas A1 and A2. Specifically, in Figure 43(a), animation displays G21 for performance are displayed in the left and right areas A1 and A2, respectively, but the contents of these animation displays G21 for performance are the same in the left and right areas A1 and A2. Also, in Figure 43(b), animation displays G22 for performance are displayed in the left and right areas A1 and A2, respectively, but the contents of these animation displays G22 for performance are the same in the left and right areas A1 and A2. In addition, in FIG. 43(c), the number of points awarded notification display G23 is displayed in both the left area A1 and the right area A2, but the content of these number of points awarded notification displays G23 is the same in the left area A1 and the right area A2.

In detail, the image of "+40 coins" is displayed as the award number notification display G23 in both the left area A1 and the right area A2 as the award number notification display G23 in FIG. 43(c). This indicates that 80 coins were awarded in the game during the first add-on period. As already explained, all award numbers that can be selected during the first add-on period are multiples of "2". Therefore, regardless of the award number selected during the first add-on period, it is possible to display the award number notification display G23 corresponding to the quotient of the award number divided by "2" in both the left area A1 and the right area A2.

During the first top-up period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two areas, the left area A1 and the right area A2, in which the same animation display G21, G22 and the number of award notification display G23 for the same effects are displayed, and various information displays G31 to G35 that are not images displayed with the same content are displayed in each of the left area A1 and the right area A2. Specifically, as shown in Figures 43(a) to 43(c), the remaining number of games to be continued image G31 for notifying the remaining number of games to be continued in the first top-up period is displayed only in the left area A1. In addition, the number of acquisitions display image G32 for notifying the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining number of awards display image G33 for notifying the remaining number of awards of game media in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the right area A2.

In the AT state ST5, if the index value IV = 1 to 9 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the first bell win or the second bell win is notified, and as shown in FIG. 43(a), the stop order notification image G34 for notifying the stop order is displayed across the boundary between the left area A1 and the right area A2 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. In addition, the performance operation device 121 (see FIG. 45) may be operated to generate an opportunity to change, add, or advance the contents of the video display on the image display device 63, and as shown in FIG. 43(b), the operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the performance operation device 121 is displayed across the boundary between the left area A1 and the right area A2 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. The performance operation device 121 is provided on the front part of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. 43(b), the operation notification image G35 is displayed during a valid operation period during which operation of the performance operation device 121 is valid. When the performance operation device 121 is operated during the valid operation period, this triggers the display of the number of points awarded notification G23 in the left area A1 and the right area A2, as shown in FIG. 43(c).

Figures 44(a) to 44(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution content of the performance executed by the image display device 63 during the second added-on period.

During the second top-up period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into four parts, top to bottom, left to right, as shown in Figures 44(a) to 44(c). These four parts, the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, have approximately the same shape and size. In the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and an award number notification display G43 are displayed, respectively, and the contents of these animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the award number notification display G43 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Specifically, in Fig. 44(a), animation display G41 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, but the contents of these animation displays G41 for effect are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Also, in Fig. 44(b), animation display G42 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, but the contents of these animation displays G42 for effect are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. In addition, in FIG. 44(c), the awarded number notification display G43 is displayed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, but the content of these awarded number notification displays G43 is the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14.

In detail, the image of "+50 coins" is displayed as the award number notification display G43 in each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14 as the award number notification display G43 in each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14. This indicates that 200 coins were awarded in the game during the second add-on period. As already explained, all of the award numbers that can be selected during the second add-on period are multiples of "4". Therefore, regardless of the award number selected during the second add-on period, it is possible to display the award number notification display G43 corresponding to the quotient of the award number divided by "4" in each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14.

During the second top-up period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into four areas, the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, in which the same animation display G41, G42 and the number of awards notification display G43 for the purpose of presentation are displayed in each of these four areas. In this configuration, various information displays G31 to G35 that are not images displayed with the same content are displayed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Specifically, as shown in Figures 44(a) to 44(c), the remaining number of games to be continued image G31 for notifying the remaining number of games to be continued during the second top-up period is displayed only in the upper left area A11. In addition, the number of acquisitions display image G32 for notifying the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining number of awards display image G33 for notifying the remaining number of awards of game media in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the upper right area A12.

In the AT state ST5, if the role selection process (Figure 13) results in one of the index values IV = 1 to 9, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to achieve the first bell winning or the second bell winning will be announced, and as shown in Figure 44 (a), the stopping order announcement image G34 for announcing the stopping order is displayed across the boundaries of the lower left area A13 and lower right area A14, regardless of the division of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14. In addition, the performance operation device 121 (see FIG. 45) may be operated to generate an opportunity to change, add, or advance the contents of the moving image display on the image display device 63, and as shown in FIG. 44(b), an operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the performance operation device 121 is displayed across the boundaries of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, regardless of the division of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The performance operation device 121 is provided on the front part of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. 44(b), the operation notification image G35 is displayed during a valid operation period during which operation of the performance operation device 121 is valid. When the performance operation device 121 is operated during the valid operation period, this triggers a number of points awarded notification display G43 to be displayed in the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14, as shown in FIG. 44(c).

The electrical configuration for enabling image display during the first and second added periods as described above will be explained with reference to the block diagram in Figure 45.

As shown in FIG. 45, the performance control board 91 of the performance control device 90 is equipped with a memory module 101, a VRAM 102, and a video display processor (VDP) 103 in addition to the performance side MPU 92.

The performance side MPU 92 functions as the main control unit in the performance control device 90, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs, etc. In detail, the performance side MPU 92 is connected via a bus to an input port 104 mounted on the performance control board 91, and various commands sent from the main side MPU 72 are input to the performance side MPU 92 through the input port 104. Note that receiving commands from the main side MPU 72 in the performance side MPU 92 is not limited to a configuration in which commands are received directly from the main side MPU 72, but also includes a configuration in which commands are received relayed to a relay board.

The production side MPU 92 is connected to the VDP 103 via a bus, and issues drawing instructions to the image display device 63 to output an image signal based on commands received from the main side MPU 72. The VDP 103 is an image generation device that reads image data stored in the memory module 101 into the VRAM 102 based on drawing instructions from the production side MPU 92, and uses the read image data, specifically by processing it, to draw on the image display device 63, and is a type of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 63b built in to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 63a in the image display device 63. The VDP 103 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

The memory module 101 prestores various image data including sprite data for designs and characters to be displayed on the image display device 63, background data, and moving image data. The memory module 101 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain the data. The memory module 101 is also used as a read-only memory (ROM) when the slot machine 10 is in use.

Here, each sprite data contains at least a combination of bitmap data that defines the character's shape and pattern, and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color for each pixel of the bitmap image. The background data is stored as JPEG format data in which still image data has been compressed. The video data is stored as MPEG format data in which multiple still image data have been compressed.

The VRAM 102 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting images to the image display device 63. The VRAM 102 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply to retain memory, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the performance control device 90 is executed satisfactorily. The VRAM 102 is used for both reading and writing when the slot machine 10 is in use.

The VRAM 102 includes a development buffer 105. Image data is transferred from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 103 to the memory module 101. The VRAM 102 also includes a frame buffer 106 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 103. The VRAM 102 may be built into the VDP 103.

The VDP 103 will be described in detail. The VDP 103 comprises a control unit 111, a register 112, a video decoder 113, and a display circuit 114. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I/F 115 for the production side MPU 92 and an I/F 116 for the VRAM 102.

The VDP 103 stores the drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the production side MPU 92 in the register 112. By storing the drawing list in the register 112, the control unit 111 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. Note that all of the control programs for the control unit 111 to operate may be provided by the drawing list, or a memory in which the control programs are pre-stored may be built into the control unit 111, and the control unit 111 executes predetermined processing based on the control program and the contents of the drawing list. Also, the control programs may be read out in advance from the memory module 101.

As part of the above process, the control unit 111 reads out image data stored in the memory module 101 into the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. The control unit 111 also creates one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer 106 using (or processing) the image data read out into the expansion buffer 105. One frame's worth of drawing data refers to data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface of the image display device 63 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

The frame buffer 106 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 106a and 106b. Specifically, a first frame area 106a and a second frame area 106b are provided. Each of these frame areas 106a and 106b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame areas 106a and 106b includes a number of unit areas that correspond to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 63a (i.e., the display surface) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is assigned to each of the RGB colors. In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

By providing the frame buffer 106 with a first frame area 106a and a second frame area 106b, while rendering is being performed on the image display device 63 using rendering data created in one frame area, rendering data to be used in the future is created for the other frame area. In other words, a double buffer system is adopted for the frame buffer 106.

In the display circuit 114, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 63a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 106a or the second frame area 106b, and the image signal is output to the image display device 63 via the output port 107 connected to the display circuit 114. In detail, drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 106a and 106b to be output to the display circuit 114. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by a scaler (not shown) and resolution adjustment is performed so that the transferred drawing data corresponds to the resolution of the image display device 63. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the image display device 63 is generated and output based on the gradation data. In addition, the video decoder 113 decodes the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration for enabling image display during the first and second added periods. Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the production side MPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short period (e.g., 4 milliseconds).

First, a performance setting process is executed to set data used to execute the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 (step S2201). Then, a display control process is executed to output a drawing list to the VDP 103 based on the data set in the performance setting process (step S2202), a light emission control process is executed to control the light emission of the upper lamp 61 based on the data set in the performance setting process (step S2203), and a sound output control process is executed to control the sound output of the speaker 62 based on the data set in the performance setting process (step S2204). In addition, a pointer update process is executed (step S2205). In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the table read into the performance side RAM 94 in the performance setting process is updated to the pointer information of the next order.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process for the added-on period, which is used to perform processing related to the added-on period in the effect setting process of step S2201 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 46).

If a winning command for the first added-on period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the first winning correspondence table is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2302). The presentation is controlled according to the first winning correspondence table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect corresponding to a winning during the first added-on period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect corresponding to a winning during the first added-on period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect corresponding to a winning during the first added-on period. Then, the first added-on performance flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2303). The first added-on performance flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to identify that a winning has occurred during the first added-on period.

If a winning command for the second added-on period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2304: YES), the second winning correspondence table is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2305). The presentation is controlled according to the second winning correspondence table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect corresponding to a winning during the second added-on period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect corresponding to a winning during the second added-on period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect corresponding to a winning during the second added-on period. Then, the second added-on performance flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2306). The second added-on performance flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to identify that a winning has occurred during the second added-on period.

If a start command for the added-on period is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2307: YES), the period start table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2308). In this case, if the first added-on period is newly started, the period start table corresponding to the first added-on period is read, and if the second added-on period is newly started, the period start table corresponding to the second added-on period is read. By controlling the execution of the performance according to the period start table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission performance corresponding to the first added-on period or the second added-on period, the speaker 62 performs a sound output performance corresponding to the first added-on period or the second added-on period, and the image display device 63 performs a display performance corresponding to the first added-on period or the second added-on period. After that, the added-on period flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2309). The added-on period flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to identify that a performance corresponding to the first added-on period or the second added-on period is being executed.

If a command is received from the main MPU 72 during the add-on period (step S2310: YES), the number of awards selected this time is determined from the information included in the command during the add-on period (step S2311). After that, if the first add-on performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2312: YES), a read process of the first add-on performance table is executed (step S2313). The performance side ROM 93 pre-stores multiple types of first add-on performance tables for each of the award numbers that can be selected during the first add-on period (see FIG. 42). In the read process of the first add-on performance table, the first add-on performance table to be used this time is determined by lottery from the first add-on performance table group corresponding to the award number determined in step S2311. Then, the determined type of first add-on performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effects according to the first added-on effect table, the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect for one game during the first added-on period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect for one game during the first added-on period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect for one game during the first added-on period. In this case, when the image display device 63 produces a display effect for one game during the first added-on period, the image display device 63 produces images as shown in Figures 43(a) to 43(c).

On the other hand, if the first added-on performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1", i.e., if the second added-on performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2312: NO), a process of reading out the second added-on performance table is executed (step S2314). In the performance side ROM 93, multiple types of second added-on performance tables are pre-stored for each of the award numbers (see FIG. 42) that can be selected during the second added-on period. In the process of reading out the second added-on performance table, the second added-on performance table to be used this time is determined by lottery from the group of second added-on performance tables corresponding to the award number grasped in step S2311. Then, the determined type of second added-on performance table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effects according to the second added-on effect table, the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect for one game during the second added-on period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect for one game during the second added-on period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect for one game during the second added-on period. In this case, when the image display device 63 produces a display effect for one game during the second added-on period, the image display device 63 produces images as shown in Figures 44(a) to 44(c).

When the add-on period flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2315: YES) and the presentation operation device 121 is in an effective operation period (step S2316: YES), it is determined whether the presentation operation device 121 has been operated (step S2317). The effective operation period of the presentation operation device 121 is set as a period midway through one game in the first add-on period or the second add-on period. During the effective operation period, an operation notification image G35 as shown in FIG. 43(b) or FIG. 44(b) is displayed on the image display device 63.

If the performance operation device 121 is being operated (step S2317: YES), an operation response process is executed (step S2318). In the operation exercise process, the location to be referenced in the first add-on performance table or the second add-on performance table read into the performance side RAM 94 is changed to the location that corresponds to the operation of the performance operation device 121. As a result, the number of awards notification displays G23, G43 as shown in Figure 43 (c) or Figure 44 (c) are displayed on the image display device 63.

If an end command for the top-up period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2319: YES), the period end table is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94 (step S2320). The performance is controlled according to the period end table, so that the upper lamp 61 produces a light-emitting effect corresponding to the end of the first or second top-up period, the speaker 62 produces a sound output effect corresponding to the end of the first or second top-up period, and the image display device 63 produces a display effect corresponding to the end of the first or second top-up period. Then, a flag clear process is executed (step S2321). In the flag clear process, the top-up period flag, the first top-up performance flag, and the second top-up performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the display control process for the added-on period, which is part of the display control process in step S2202 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 46), and is used to perform processing related to the added-on period.

If the first added performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2401: YES), the two-split designation information is stored in a register of the performance side MPU 92 (step S2402), and from the data to be referenced in the current processing round in the period start table and the first added performance table read into the performance side RAM 94, the split side image data required to display the video display G21, G22 or the award number notification display G23 in the left area A1 and right area A2 of the image display device 63 is determined (step S2403), and the parameters to be applied to the split side image data are determined (step S2404). These parameters include information such as the coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the split side image data.

When the game is not currently being executed, the period start table is the table to be referenced, and when the game is currently being executed, the first added performance table is the table to be referenced. In addition, the period start table and the first added performance table do not have the image data of the divided side corresponding to the left area A1 and the right area A2 set individually, but only the image data of the divided side corresponding to the left area A1 is set, and in step S2403, the image data of the divided side is grasped. The information of the grasped image data of the divided side is set in a drawing list and sent to VDP103. VDP103 reads the image data of the divided side from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of VRAM102 based on the drawing list, and creates drawing data for performing the animation display G21, G22 or the awarded number notification display G23 for the left area A1 using the read image data of the divided side, and further copies the drawing data as the drawing data of the right area A2 side. This eliminates the need to set the divided side image data information corresponding to the left area A1 and the right area A2 individually in the period start table and the first added-on performance table, making it possible to reduce the data capacity of these period start table and the first added-on performance table. Also, since VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data separately for each of the left area A1 and the right area A2, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the drawing process.

As described above, in the first added-on performance table, the divided side image data information required to display the number of awards notification display G23 is set only for the left side area A1. In contrast, in the performance setting process for the added-on period (FIG. 47), when a command is received during the added-on period, the number of awards selected in the added-on lottery process for the current added-on period (step S2104) is determined. This number of awards is the sum of the number of awards notified in the number of awards notification display G23 in the left side area A1 and the number of awards notified in the number of awards notification display G23 in the right side area A2. Therefore, the divided side image data information required to display the number of awards notification display G23 set in the first added-on performance table is image data information indicating the quotient value obtained by dividing the number of awards set in the command during the added-on period, i.e., the number of awards determined in step S2311, by "2".

If the first overlay performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S2401: NO), the four-division designation information is stored in a register of the performance side MPU 92 (step S2405), and from the data to be referenced in the current processing round in the period start table and the second overlay performance table read into the performance side RAM 94, the divided side image data required to display the performance video display G41, G42 or the award number notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14 of the image display device 63 is determined (step S2406), and the parameters to be applied to the divided side image data are determined (step S2407). These parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the divided side image data.

When the game is not currently being played, the period start table is the table to be referenced, and when the game is currently being played, the second added-on performance table is the table to be referenced. Furthermore, the period start table and the second added-on performance table do not have the divided side image data corresponding to the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 set individually, but only the divided side image data corresponding to the upper left area A11 is set, and in step S2406, the divided side image data is grasped. The information of the grasped divided side image data is set in a drawing list and sent to VDP103. Based on the drawing list, the VDP 103 reads the image data of the divided side from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and creates drawing data for displaying the animation G41, G42 or the number of awards notification display G43 for the upper left area A11 using the read image data of the divided side, and further copies the drawing data as drawing data for the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the period start table and the second added-on performance table, since it is not necessary to set the information of the divided side image data corresponding to the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 individually in the period start table and the second added-on performance table. In addition, since the VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data individually for each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the drawing process.

As described above, in the second add-on performance table, the information on the divided side image data required to display the number of bonuses notification display G43 is set only for the upper left area A11. In contrast, in the performance setting process for the add-on period (FIG. 47), when a command is received during the add-on period, the number of bonuses selected in the add-on lottery process for the current add-on period (step S2104) is determined. This number of bonuses is the sum of the number of bonuses notified in the number of bonuses notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, the number of bonuses notified in the number of bonuses notification display G43 in the upper right area A12, the number of bonuses notified in the number of bonuses notification display G43 in the lower left area A13, and the number of bonuses notified in the number of bonuses notification display G43 in the lower right area A14. Therefore, the image data information on the split side required to perform the award number notification display G43 set in the second added-on performance table is image data information showing the quotient value obtained by dividing the award number set in the command during the added-on period, i.e., the award number grasped in step S2311, by "4".

When the processing of step S2404 or step S2407 is executed, the historical image data corresponding to the game history is grasped (step S2408). The historical image data includes image data for displaying the remaining number of continued games image G31, image data for displaying the number of acquisitions display image G32, and image data for displaying the remaining number of awards display image G33. Based on various commands received from the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 is capable of identifying the remaining number of continued games in the first addition period or the second addition period, the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5, and the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5, and grasps the historical image data corresponding to the various identified information in step S2408. In addition, the parameters to be applied to the grasped historical image data are grasped (step S2409). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the historical image data, and are fixed information. This fixed information is preset in the production side ROM 93.

After that, if the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified (step S2410: YES), the stop order image data for displaying the stop order notification image G34 to be displayed this time is grasped (step S2411). Based on various commands received from the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 can specify whether the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified, and if the stop order is to be notified, the type of the stop order. In step S2411, the stop order image data is grasped according to the various information specified. In addition, the parameters to be applied to the grasped stop order image data are grasped (step S2412). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the stop order image data, and are fixed information. This fixed information is set in advance in the production side ROM 93.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2410 or when the processing of step S2412 is executed, it is judged whether or not the operation device 121 for performance is operated during the operation effective period of the operation device 121 (step S2413). Whether or not the operation device 121 for performance is in the operation effective period is identified from the first added performance table or the second added performance table read into the performance side RAM 94. When the operation device 121 for performance is operated during the operation effective period (step S2413: YES), the operation performance image data for displaying the operation notification image G35 is grasped from the data to be referred to in the current processing in the first added performance table or the second added performance table read into the performance side RAM 94 (step S2414), and the parameters to be applied to the operation performance image data are grasped (step S2415). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value to be applied to the operation performance image data, and are fixed information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2413 or if the processing of step S2415 is executed, a drawing list output process is executed (step S2416). In the drawing list output process, the information of the various image data grasped in steps S2401 to S2415, the parameters to be applied to the various image data, and other information are set in the drawing list, and the drawing list after the settings is sent to the VDP 103. In this case, if two-split designation information is stored in the register of the production side MPU 92 in step S2402, the two-split designation information is set in the drawing list, and if four-split designation information is stored in the register of the production side MPU 92 in step S2405, the four-split designation information is set in the drawing list.

The VDP 103 reads image data from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 according to the received drawing list, and sets the read image data in the frame areas 106a and 106b of the frame buffer 106 for which drawing data is to be created after applying parameters and various processing. As a result, drawing data corresponding to the drawing list is created in the frame areas 106a and 106b, and the created drawing data is set in the image processing device 63b of the image display device 63, causing an image corresponding to the drawing data to be displayed on the image display device 63.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the drawing process of a divided image executed by VDP 103 during the first or second added-on period. Figures 50(a) to 50(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data is created in frame areas 106a and 106b of the frame buffer 106 as a result of the drawing process of the divided image being executed.

If the received drawing list has two-division designation information set (step S2501: YES), the divided side image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2502), and the parameters to be applied to the divided side image data are obtained from the drawing list (step S2503). Then, with the parameters obtained in step S2503 applied, the divided side image data read to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2502 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn among the first and second frame areas 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106 (step S2504). In this case, the parameters obtained in step S2503 are set with coordinates and magnification for drawing the divided side image data obtained in step S2502 in the left area A1 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. Therefore, as shown in Figure 50 (a), the divided side image data D1 is drawn in the first section area DA1 when divided into two, which corresponds to the left area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63, of the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn. The divided side image data D1 is data for displaying the animation display G22 for presentation, but the same is true for the animation display G21 for presentation and the award number notification display G23.

Then, the divided side image data D1 drawn in the first section area DA1 when divided into two is copied to the second section area DA2 when divided into two, which corresponds to the right area A2 of the display surface of the image display device 63, in the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn (step S2505). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the same divided side image data D1 is drawn in each of the first section area DA1 when divided into two and the second section area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn.

After that, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, the parameters to be applied to the history image data are read from the drawing list, and the history image data read in step S2506 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2507). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the image data D2 corresponding to the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the image data D3 corresponding to the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the image data D4 corresponding to the remaining number of awards display image G33 are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data D2 to D4 are overwritten with an opaque alpha value applied to the divided image data D1 in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, so that the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the remaining number of awards display image G33 are displayed in front of the animation displays G21, G22 for effects, and the award number notification display G23. However, it may also be configured so that they are blended with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2509). Then, the parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read from the drawing list, and the stop order image data read in step S2509 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2510). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque α value applied to the divided image data D1 so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the award number notification display G23. However, it may also be configured so that the blending occurs with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

After that, if the operation performance image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation performance image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2512). Then, the parameters to be applied to the operation performance image data are read from the drawing list, and the operation performance image data read in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2513). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque α value applied to the divided image data D1 so that the operation notification image G35 is displayed in front of the animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the number of awards notification display G23. However, it may also be configured so that the blending occurs with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

If the two-division designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2501: NO), that is, if the four-division designation information is set, the divided side image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2514), and the parameters to be applied to the divided side image data are grasped from the drawing list (step S2515). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2515 applied, the divided side image data read to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2514 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn among the first and second frame areas 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106 (step S2516). In this case, the parameters grasped in step S2515 are set with coordinates and magnification for drawing the divided side image data grasped in step S2514 in the upper left area A11 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. Therefore, the image data of the divided side is drawn in the first section area of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, which corresponds to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 when divided into four sections.

Then, the divided side image data drawn in the first section area when divided into four is copied to the second divided area when divided into four corresponding to the upper right area A12 of the display surface of the image display device 63, the third divided area when divided into four corresponding to the lower left area A13, and the fourth divided area when divided into four corresponding to the lower right area A14 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn (step S2517). This results in the same divided side image data being drawn in the first divided area when divided into four, the second divided area when divided into four, the third divided area when divided into four, and the fourth divided area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn.

After that, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, the parameters to be applied to the history image data are read from the drawing list, and the history image data read in step S2506 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2507). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, the image data corresponding to the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the image data corresponding to the remaining number of awards display image G33 are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, these image data are overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque alpha value applied to the image data on the divided side so that the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, and the remaining number of awards display image G33 are displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the award number notification display G43. However, it may also be configured so that the blending occurs with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2509). Then, the parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read from the drawing list, and the stop order image data read in step S2509 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2510). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque alpha value applied to the image data on the divided side so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the award number notification display G43. However, it may also be configured so that the blending occurs with a semi-transparent alpha value applied.

After that, if the operation performance image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation performance image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2512). Then, the parameters to be applied to the operation performance image data are read from the drawing list, and the operation performance image data read in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with the read parameters applied (step S2513). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn with an opaque α value applied to the image data on the divided side so that the operation notification image G35 is displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for performance and the number of awards notification display G43. However, it may be configured to be blended with a semi-transparent α value applied.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

By setting the image data D1 at the time of division in each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, the animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the award number notification display G23 are displayed in each of the left area A1 and right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63. As a result, when displaying the animation displays G21 and G22 for performance and the award number notification display G23 in each of the left area A1 and right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63, it is only necessary to set the same image data D1 at the time of division in each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two using the same image data. Therefore, it is possible to perform the display on the image display device 63 in an optimal manner.

The image data D1 at the time of division, which is drawn using image data in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division, is copied to the second divided area DA2 at the time of division, and the image data D1 at the time of division is set in the second divided area DA2 at the time of division. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the image data D1 at the time of division is drawn using image data for each of the first divided area DA1 at the time of division and the second divided area DA2 at the time of division. It is also possible to set the image data D1 at the time of division in the second divided area DA2 at the time of division using the image data D1 at the time of division drawn in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division.

In a state where the same animation displays G21, G22 and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation are displayed in each of the partitioned left and right areas A1 and A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63, the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation notification image G35, which are not images displayed with the same content, are displayed in each of the left and right areas A1 and A2. This makes it possible to provide display contents other than the animation displays G21, G22, and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation by the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation notification image G35, which are displayed independently of the left and right areas A1 and A2, while drawing attention to the animation displays G21, G22, and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation displayed in the left and right areas A1 and A2, respectively. This allows the image display device 63 to display optimally.

In a configuration in which the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 respectively display animation displays G21, G22 and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation, and the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed, the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed as if they are in front of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, making the remaining number of games to continue image G31, the number of acquisitions display image G32, the remaining number of awards display image G33, the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 stand out.

The animation displays G21, G22 and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation purposes are displayed within the respective ranges of the left area A1 and the right area A2, while the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed across the boundaries between the left area A1 and the right area A2. This makes it possible to display the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 in a size larger than the animation displays G21, G22 and the number of awards notification display G23 for presentation purposes.

During the first add-on period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two, a left area A1 and a right area A2, whereas during the second add-on period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into four, an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13 and a lower right area A14. This makes it possible to diversify the display content when using multiple display areas to display the animation displays G21, G22, G41, G42 for performance and the award number notification displays G23, G43.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the drawing process of the divided images is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the divided image drawing process in this embodiment executed by VDP103.

If two-split designation information is set in the received drawing list (step S2601: YES), the split side image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2602), and the parameters to be applied to the split side image data are obtained from the drawing list (step S2603). Then, with the parameters obtained in step S2603 applied, the split side image data read to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2602 is drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2604).

Then, the magnification setting process for the two-division is executed (step S2605). In the magnification setting process for the two-division, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2604 is changed so that the size of the drawing data is the same as the size of the first section area DA1 when divided into two, which corresponds to the left area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63, among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. Then, the drawing data after the size change is copied to each of the first section area DA1 when divided into two, which corresponds to the left area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63, among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, and the second section area DA2 when divided into two, which corresponds to the right area A2 of the display surface of the image display device 63 (step S2606). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the image data D1 of the same division side is drawn in each of the first section area DA1 when divided into two and the second section area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn.

Then, the process of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The process of steps S2607 to S2614 is the same as the process of steps S2506 to S2513 in the drawing process of the divided images in the fourth embodiment (Figure 49).

If two-division designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2601: NO), i.e., if four-division designation information is set, the image data of the divided side set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2615), and the parameters to be applied to the image data of the divided side are determined from the drawing list (step S2616). Then, with the parameters determined in step S2616 applied, the image data of the divided side read to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2615 is drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2617).

Then, a magnification setting process for dividing into four is executed (step S2618). In the magnification setting process for dividing into four, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2617 is changed so that the size of the drawing data is the same as the size of the first section area when divided into four corresponding to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. Then, the drawing data after the size change is copied to each of the first section area when divided into four corresponding to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, the second section area when divided into four corresponding to the upper right area A12 of the display surface of the image display device 63, the third section area when divided into four corresponding to the lower left area A13 of the display surface of the image display device 63, and the fourth section area when divided into four corresponding to the lower right area A14 of the display surface of the image display device 63 (step S2619). This results in image data for the same division being drawn in the first section area when divided into four, the second section area when divided into four, the third section area when divided into four, and the fourth section area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn.

Then, the process of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The process of steps S2607 to S2614 is the same as the process of steps S2506 to S2513 in the drawing process of the divided images in the fourth embodiment (Figure 49).

According to the above configuration, the image data of the split side is first drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and the drawn image data of the split side is copied to the first section area when divided into two and the second section area when divided into two in the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn in the case of a two-split display, and copied to the first section area when divided into four, the second section area when divided into four, the third section area when divided into four and the fourth section area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a, 106b to be drawn in the case of a four-split display. This allows the data drawn in a portion of the frame area 106a, 106b to be drawn on to be displayed without being drawn in other areas of the frame area 106a, 106b. In the case of a two-split display, the same animation displays G21, G22 and the award number notification display G23 can be displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2 of the image display device 63, respectively. In the case of a four-split display, the same animation displays G41, G42 and the award number notification display G43 can be displayed in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 of the image display device 63, respectively.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. The configurations of the above-described embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually or in combination with each other to the configuration obtained by combining the configurations of the above-described embodiments with each other.

(1) In the first embodiment described above, the AT state ST5 is not limited to ending when the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". The AT state ST5 may end when the remaining number of continuing games in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", or the AT state ST5 may end when the number of predetermined winnings that have been achieved in the AT state ST5 reaches the upper limit. Even in this case, if the state is a false premonition state or a real premonition state, the AT state ST5 may continue even if the remaining number of continuing games in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" or the number of predetermined winnings that have been achieved in the AT state ST5 reaches the upper limit.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 becomes "0" in the false premonition state and the AT state ST5 continues, and a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103), the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the number of awards selected in the direct win is immediately awarded, and the number of awards may be awarded when the false premonition state in progress ends. In this case, even if game media are awarded in a situation in which the false premonition state continues, the remaining number of awards of game media in the AT state ST5 is maintained at "0", and the award of game media that occurs in a situation in which the false premonition state ends and the AT state ST5 continues is used to subtract the number of awards due to the direct win. This makes it easier for the AT state ST5 to continue for a longer period of time.

(3) In the first embodiment described above, if a false premonition is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) when the player is in a false premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state may be increased. For example, if a false premonition is won when the player is in a false premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued may be increased by resetting the initial number of games to 10 as the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state, or the initial number of games to be continued may be added to the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state, thereby increasing the number of remaining games to be continued. If the event occurs when the player is in a false premonition state and the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the continued AT state ST5 ends will essentially increase, and the player will hope for a false premonition win.

Also, even if a false premonition win occurs in a false premonition state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state may not be increased, and if a false premonition win occurs in a false premonition state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state may be increased. This makes it possible to not increase the number of remaining games to be continued in the false premonition state even if a false premonition win occurs in a situation where the AT state ST5 is continuing due to the false premonition state, but to substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends by causing a false premonition win.

(4) In the first embodiment, when the player is in a false premonition state and the player wins the real premonition in the additional lottery process (step S1103), the player may be upgraded to the real premonition state and the number of remaining games to be played in the real premonition state may be increased from the number of remaining games to be played in the previous false premonition state. For example, when the player is in a false premonition state and the player wins the real premonition, the number of remaining games to be played in the real premonition state may be increased by resetting the initial number of games to 10, or the number of remaining games to be played in the previous false premonition state may be increased by adding the initial number of games to the number of remaining games to be played in the previous false premonition state. If the event occurs in a false premonition state and the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the AT state ST5 is ended will be substantially increased, and the player will expect to win the real premonition.

Also, even if a real premonition win occurs in a false premonition state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the remaining number of games to be continued in the previous false premonition state may be inherited in the subsequent real premonition state, and if a real premonition win occurs in a false premonition state in a situation where the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0", the remaining number of games to be continued in the subsequent real premonition state may be increased from the remaining number of games to be continued in the previous false premonition state. This makes it possible to prevent the remaining number of games to be continued in the subsequent real premonition state from being increased even if a real premonition win occurs in a situation where the AT state ST5 is continuing due to the false premonition state, while making it possible to substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends by generating a real premonition win in a situation where the AT state ST5 is continuing due to the false premonition state.

(5) In the first embodiment described above, if a false premonition win or a real premonition win is obtained in the additional lottery process (step S1103) when the player is in the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state may be increased. For example, if a false premonition win or a real premonition win is obtained when the player is in the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued may be increased by resetting the initial number of games to 10 as the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state, or the initial number of games to be continued may be added to the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state, thereby increasing the number of remaining games to be continued. If the event occurs when the player is in the real premonition state and the remaining number of game media awarded in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required until the continued AT state ST5 ends will essentially increase, and the player will hope for a false premonition win or a real premonition win.

Also, in a situation where the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 is not "0", even if a false premonition win or a real premonition win occurs in the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state may not be increased, and in a situation where the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 is "0", even if a false premonition win or a real premonition win occurs in the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state may be increased. In this way, in a situation where the AT state ST5 is continuing due to the real premonition state, the number of remaining games to be continued in the real premonition state is not increased even if a false premonition win or a real premonition win occurs in a situation where the AT state ST5 is continuing due to the real premonition state, and the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends can be substantially increased by the occurrence of a false premonition win or a real premonition win.

(6) In the first embodiment described above, when a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in a false premonition state or a real premonition state where the remaining number of game media to be awarded in AT state ST5 is "0", a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of game media is more likely to be awarded than when a direct win occurs in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in other situations. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of a direct win in a false premonition state or a real premonition state where the remaining number of game media to be awarded in AT state ST5 is "0".

(7) In the second and third embodiments, even if the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process for the role in the pseudo bonus state ST4 (FIG. 13), the right reel 32R may be configured to stop for the first time or the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, so that the benefit of incrementing the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 by 1 is not given. Also, even if the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process for the role in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (FIG. 13), the right reel 32R may be configured to stop for the first time or the combination of the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, so that the benefit of incrementing the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 by 1 is not given. In addition, even if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the benefit of adding 2 to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 may not be awarded unless the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time or the combination of the "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol is stopped on the main line ML.

(8) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the index value IV=17 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 13), the first special replay prize can only be won when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. However, this is not limited to this, and the first special replay prize can also be won when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, or when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time.

(9) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 13), the first or second special replay prize can only be won when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. However, this is not limited to this, and the first or second special replay prize can only be won when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, or the first or second special replay prize can be won when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time.

(10) In the second and third embodiments described above, if index value IV = 18 is won in the role selection process (Figure 13), when the right reel 32R is caused to stop for the first time, a first special replay prize may be awarded but a second special replay prize may not be awarded, and when the middle reel 32M is caused to stop for the first time, a second special replay prize may be awarded but a first special replay prize may not be awarded. In this case, if index value IV = 17 or 18 is hit in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if index value IV = 17 is hit in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, a red 7 notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, and if index value IV = 18 is hit in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, a BAR notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. This makes it possible to reduce the probability of a second special replay winning being achieved when index value IV = 18 is hit in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and of a first special replay winning being achieved when index value IV = 18 is hit in the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

(11) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning occurs in a situation that is not the pseudo bonus state ST4, a first irregular notification sound is output to allow the player to recognize that a replay winning has occurred, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a first irregular notification sound may be output to indicate that the winning will not trigger a transition to the AT state ST5, or a notification sound may be output to indicate that the current state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4.

(12) In the second and third embodiments described above, when the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is achieved in a situation other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, while the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are configured not to execute an irregular notification. However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 may be configured to emit light corresponding to the first irregular, and an image corresponding to the first irregular may be displayed on the image display device 63.

(13) In the second and third embodiments described above, when a second special replay winning occurs in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the speaker 62 outputs a second irregular notification sound, while the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not perform an irregular notification. However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the second irregular notification sound being output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the second irregular, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the second irregular.

(14) In the third embodiment described above, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, but the first special replay winning occurs, the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, while the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not perform an irregular notification. However, this is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the third irregular notification sound being output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the third irregular, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the third irregular.

(15) In the second and third embodiments, when the index value IV = 18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), if the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is reached, a red 7 notification is executed, and if the second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is reached, a BAR notification is executed. However, this is not limited to the above. For example, if the index value IV = 18 is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4, a red 7 notification is executed to prompt the player to win the first special replay, and if the index value IV = 18 is won in the AT state ST5, a BAR notification is executed to prompt the player to win the second special replay. In this case, if the index value IV = 18 is won in a state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the first special replay is won, a corresponding irregular notification is executed, and if the index value IV = 18 is won in a state other than the AT state ST5 and the second special replay is won, a corresponding irregular notification is executed.

(16) In the second and third embodiments, if the index value IV = 17 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 without fail. However, this is not limited to the above, and if the lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 17 is selected, and if the lottery process is a win, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 may be incremented by 1. In this case, if the lottery process is a win, a red 7 notification is executed to indicate that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, and if the winning lottery process is a miss, it is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed.

(17) In the second and third embodiments, if the index value IV = 18 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 without fail. However, this is not limited to the above, and if the lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 18 is selected, and if the lottery process is a win, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 may be incremented by 1. In this case, if the lottery process is a win, the first stop is the right reel 32R and a red 7 notification is executed to indicate that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, and if the winning lottery process is a miss, it is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed.

(18) In the second and third embodiments, if the index value IV = 18 is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 2 without fail. However, this is not limited to this, and the lottery process may be executed when the index value IV = 18 is selected, and if the lottery process is a win, the value of the advantageous counter at the transition in the main RAM 74 may be incremented by 2. In this case, if the lottery process is a win, a BAR notification is executed to indicate that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the "BAR" symbol should be aimed for on the main line ML, and if the winning lottery process is a miss, it is preferable that the BAR notification is not executed.

(19) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided horizontally into two regions, a left region A1 and a right region A2, during the first added-on period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display surface of the image display device 63 may be divided vertically into two regions, a top region and a bottom region, during the first added-on period. In addition, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided vertically and horizontally into two regions, a top left region A11, a top right region A12, a bottom left region A13 and a bottom right region A14, during the second added-on period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display surface of the image display device 63 may be divided vertically into four regions, or horizontally into four regions, during the second added-on period.

(20) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the effect of dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into multiple display areas is configured to occur during the first or second added-on period, but this is not limited to this and may occur in other situations. Also, as the effect of dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into multiple display areas, a two-division effect and a four-division effect are set, but in addition to or instead of this, a three-division effect, a five-division effect, an eight-division effect, a nine-division effect, etc. may also be present.

(21) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the image data D1 at the time of division is copied to at least the second divided area DA2 when divided into two of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, but this is not limited to the above. The image data D1 at the time of division may be drawn to the first divided area DA1 when divided into two using image data, and the image data D1 at the time of division may be drawn to the second divided area DA2 when divided into two using image data. Even in this case, the image data used to draw the image data D1 at the time of division to the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the image data used to draw the image data D1 at the time of division to the second divided area DA2 when divided into two are the same, so that the amount of image data read from the memory module 101 to draw the image data D1 at the time of division can be reduced.

(22) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the left area A1 and the right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63 are configured to display the same image as the animation display G21, G22 or the number of winnings notification display G23 for performance purposes, respectively. However, different images may be displayed. Even in this case, by displaying the stop order notification image G34 or the operation notification image G35 across the left area A1 and the right area A2, it is possible to make the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 stand out.

(23) The number of active lines is not limited to the main line ML, and may be two, three, four or more active lines. In this case, the number of active lines may be increased as the number of gaming media bets increases, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of gaming media bets.

(24) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. For example, when a winning event corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be displayed on the image display device 63 or the like. In addition, when some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning or have stopped even when all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, corresponding information may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, a presentation corresponding to the spinning status of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be performed on the image display device 63 or the like.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus of paying out medals is awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be configured in any way as long as the bonus is awarded to the player. For example, a prize other than medals may be awarded when a small winning combination is achieved. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have a function for inserting actual medals or paying out medals, but rather manages medals owned by the player by credit, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the awarding of a bonus.

(26) The present invention may be applied to so-called B-type slot machines, or to any type of slot machine, such as C-type, a combination of A-type and C-type, a combination of B-type and C-type, or a type equipped with an RT game, CT game, or ART game. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which a bonus state advantageous to the player exists.

(27) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. In addition, symbols may be formed using light, color, etc., or using three-dimensional shapes, etc., or may be a combination of these. In other words, the symbols may function as identifiable information.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of a slot machine 10 is shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as a gaming medium, or to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to fifth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configurations of the first embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configurations of the second embodiment and the characteristic configurations of the fourth embodiment, or the characteristic configurations of the third embodiment and the characteristic configurations of the fifth embodiment. In addition, the configurations of the other embodiments may be applied in any combination to a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fifth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. An information update means (a function for executing the process of step S1204 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means (the AT continuation counter 74e in the first embodiment) to the side approaching the end information ("0") based on the occurrence of an update trigger (a game medium being awarded) when the game is executed in a favorable game state (AT state ST5) favorable to the player;
A termination means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the continuation reference information has become the termination information (a function for executing the processing of steps S1213 to S1215 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
A state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state without terminating the advantageous gaming state by the terminating means even if the continuation reference information becomes the termination information when the advantageous gaming state is in a predetermined performance execution state (false premonition state) (a function for making a negative determination in step S1212 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature A1, when a predetermined performance execution status is reached, the advantageous game state continues without ending even if the continuation reference information becomes end information. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the advantageous game state can continue even if the continuation reference information becomes end information. It is also possible to prevent the predetermined performance execution status from ending midway due to the end of the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, wherein the termination means terminates the advantageous gaming state when the predetermined performance execution status is reached in the advantageous gaming state and the continuation reference information becomes the termination information and the advantageous gaming state is continued, and when the predetermined performance execution status is reached in a situation where the continuation reference information is the termination information, the advantageous gaming state is terminated.

According to feature A2, if the advantageous game state continues even if the continuation reference information is end information due to the specified performance execution status, the advantageous game state also ends when the specified performance execution status ends while the continuation reference information remains end information. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing excessively.

Feature A3. A predetermined update means (a function for executing the process of step S1105 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) is provided for updating the continuation reference information to a side away from the end information based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (a direct hit in the additional lottery process of step S1103) in the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine described in feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the specified update means updates the continuation standard information to move it away from the end information based on the occurrence of the specified trigger in a situation in which the advantageous gaming state is being continued by the state continuation means.

According to feature A3, the continuation criteria information is updated to move away from the end information based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger in a favorable gaming state. Therefore, the player will expect the predetermined trigger to occur in the favorable gaming state. In this case, if the favorable gaming state continues even if the continuation criteria information is end information due to the presence of a predetermined performance execution situation, if a predetermined trigger occurs in this continuing state, the continuation criteria information is updated to move away from the end information. This makes it possible to make the player expect that a predetermined trigger will occur even in the continuing state.

Feature A4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that the predetermined performance execution status continues over a predetermined number of games, which is a plurality of games, and in each game in the predetermined performance execution status, the execution content of the performance is determined in a manner corresponding to the predetermined performance execution status.

According to feature A4, the predetermined performance execution status continues for a predetermined number of games, and the execution content of the performance is determined in each game in the predetermined performance execution status in a manner corresponding to the predetermined performance execution status, so that it is possible to provide a series of performances across multiple games in the predetermined performance execution status. In this case, with the configuration of feature A1 described above, when the predetermined performance execution status is present, the advantageous game state continues without ending even if the continuation criteria information becomes end information, so that it is possible to prevent a series of performances across multiple games in the predetermined performance execution status from ending midway due to the end of the advantageous game state.

Feature A5. Equipped with a predetermined performance start means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1116 to S1118 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) for starting the predetermined performance execution situation based on the occurrence of a performance start trigger,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the specified performance start means continues the specified performance execution status currently being executed rather than starting a new specified performance execution status even if the performance start trigger occurs during the specified performance execution status.

According to feature A5, even if a trigger occurs to start a performance during a specified performance execution situation, the specified performance execution situation is not started anew, and the currently running specified performance execution situation continues. This makes it possible to prevent the specified performance execution situation from continuing excessively.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect execution state continues for a predetermined number of games, which is a plurality of games;
The gaming machine described in feature A5 is characterized in that the specified performance start means does not increase the remaining number of continuing games in the specified performance execution status even if the performance start trigger occurs in the specified performance execution status.

According to feature A6, even if a trigger occurs to start a performance during a specified performance execution situation, the number of remaining games to be continued during that specified performance execution situation is not increased, so it is possible to prevent the specified performance execution situation from continuing excessively.

Feature A7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A6, characterized in that the predetermined performance execution status does not trigger an update of the continuation criteria information away from the end information.

According to feature A7, although the specified performance execution status does not trigger an update of the continuation reference information away from the end information, when the specified performance execution status is met, the advantageous game state continues without ending even if the continuation reference information becomes end information. This makes it possible for the specified performance execution status, which only serves as a performance that does not affect the player's profit when the continuation reference information is not end information, to become a status for continuing the advantageous game state when the continuation reference information is end information, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the specified performance execution status.

Feature A8. The state continuation means continues the advantageous gaming state without terminating the advantageous gaming state by the terminating means even if the continuation reference information becomes the termination information when a specific performance execution status (this premonition state) is in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine described in feature A7, characterized in that the specific performance execution status serves as an opportunity to update the continuation standard information to move it away from the end information.

According to feature A8, even if the continuation reference information becomes end information when the specific performance execution status is in effect, the advantageous game state continues, and the specific performance execution status becomes an opportunity to update the continuation reference information to move it away from the end information. As a result, if the advantageous game state continues because the specific performance execution status or the specific performance execution status is in effect, even if the continuation reference information becomes end information, the player will expect to be in the specific performance execution status.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A8, wherein the information update means updates the continuation reference information to approach the end information based on the occurrence of the update trigger as the game is executed, when the continuation reference information is not the end information in the specified performance execution status.

According to feature A9, even if the specified performance execution status is reached, if the continuation criteria information is not end information, the game is executed and an update trigger occurs, and the continuation criteria information is updated to approach the end information. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage of being in the specified performance execution status from becoming too high.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features A1 to A9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group A can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A symbol display means (reel unit 31) that displays symbols in a variable manner;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
a game start means for determining a game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means (a function for making a positive determination in step S304 in the master MPU 72);
A role selection means (a function for selecting a role in the master MPU 72) for selecting a role when the game is in the execution state;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A symbol display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the symbol display means so that the display of the symbols is started when the game is in the execution state, and the display of the symbols is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning response control means (a function of executing a medium granting process in the main MPU 72 and a response process at the end of a game) for executing a control corresponding to a winning role when a stop result corresponding to a winning role in the lottery process for the winning role is displayed after the changing display of the picture by the control of the picture display control means, as a winning corresponding to the winning role is established;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A special role (index value IV=17 or 18 in the second and third embodiments) is set as a role that will be won in the lottery process of the role,
The picture display control means enables a predetermined stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols or a combination of "BAR" symbols in the second and third embodiments) to be displayed based on the stop operation means being operated in a predetermined stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "red 7" symbol is aimed at on the main line ML, or a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "BAR" symbol is aimed at on the main line ML) when the special combination is won,
This gaming machine is
A special notification control means for executing a special notification (a red 7 notification when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, or a BAR notification when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) that allows a player to recognize that he or she should operate the stop operation means in the predetermined stop mode when the special combination is won in a predetermined notification target situation (a pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, or a latter situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols). (When the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: a function of executing the processes of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the master MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1502 of the performance side MPU 92; when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function of executing the processes of steps S1412 to S1413 of the master MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1504 of the performance side MPU 92)
A predetermined display that causes a predetermined display notification (the first irregular notification sound in the second and third embodiments or the third irregular notification sound in the third embodiment when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, and the first irregular notification sound or the second irregular notification sound when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) to be executed based on the predetermined stop result being displayed by operating the stop operation means in the predetermined stop mode in a predetermined non-notification situation in which the special role is won but the special notification is not executed (a situation that is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, and a situation that is not the latter half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols). Notification control means (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: a function for executing the process of step S1704 of the master MPU 72 in the second embodiment and a function for executing the process of step S1510 of the performance side MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S1803 or step S1806 of the master MPU 72 in the third embodiment; when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function for executing the process of step S1707 or step S1710 of the master MPU 72 in the second embodiment and a function for executing the process of step S1510 or step S1512 of the performance side MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S1809 or step S1812 of the master MPU 72 in the third embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, when a special role is won in a predetermined notification target situation, a special notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode, so that the predetermined stop result can be displayed by operating the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode in accordance with the special notification. In this case, a predetermined display notification is executed based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined stop mode and the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation in which a special role is won but a special notification is not executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined stop result has been displayed in a situation in which the predetermined stop result should not be displayed, and prevents the player from becoming confused by the display of the predetermined stop result. This makes it possible to ensure that the game is played in an optimal manner.

Feature B2: The symbol display means includes a plurality of symbol display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably display the symbols;
The predetermined stop mode includes a mode in which the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order (the right reel 32R is stopped first),
When the special combination is won, even if the stop operation means is operated so that the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas stops in the predetermined stop order, the predetermined stop result may not be displayed,
The gaming machine described in feature B1, characterized in that the specified display notification control means does not execute the specified display notification if the specified stop result is not displayed even if the stop operation means is operated so that the varying display of the patterns in the multiple pattern display areas stops in the specified stop order in the specified non-notification situation.

According to feature B2, even if the image variation display is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a predetermined non-alarm situation, if the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the predetermined display notification is not executed. This makes it possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined display notification is executed to a situation in which the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-alarm situation, and makes it possible to prevent the predetermined display notification from being executed excessively.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that no penalty is given to the player even if the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-alarm situation.

According to feature B3, when a predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation, a predetermined display notification is executed but no penalty is given to the player. This makes it possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring to a player who has caused a predetermined stop result to be displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation due to an operational error.

Feature B4. A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that it is equipped with a predetermined benefit granting means (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: a function for executing the processing of step S1604 or step S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function for executing the processing of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) that grants a predetermined benefit to the player when a predetermined event occurs in the predetermined notification target situation, which is either winning the special role or displaying the predetermined stop result, and does not grant the predetermined benefit to the player even if the predetermined event occurs in the predetermined non-notification situation.

According to feature B4, in a configuration in which a predetermined event occurs in a predetermined notification situation, that is, either winning a special role or displaying a predetermined stop result, a predetermined profit is awarded to the player, and the predetermined profit is not awarded even if the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined non-notification situation, a predetermined display notification is executed when the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification situation. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming confused because the predetermined profit was not awarded even though the predetermined stop result was displayed in the predetermined non-notification situation.

Feature B5. A specific profit granting means for granting a specific profit to a player that is less advantageous to the player than the predetermined profit when the special role is won in the predetermined non-notification situation and the predetermined stop result is displayed (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: a function for executing the replay profit of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function for executing the replay profit of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment and a function for executing the process of step S1604 or step S1608 of the main MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined display notification is executed so as to enable the player to recognize that the specific benefit has been awarded.

According to feature B5, in a configuration in which a specific benefit that is less advantageous to the player than a specific benefit that is granted to the player when a specific event occurs in which a specific role is won and a specific stop result is displayed in a specific non-notification situation, the specific benefit is granted to the player, and when a specific event occurs in which a specific role is won and a specific stop result is displayed in a specific non-notification situation, a specific display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that a specific benefit has been granted. This makes it possible to make the player recognize that a specific benefit, not a specific benefit, has been granted when a specific role is won and a specific stop result is displayed in a specific non-notification situation.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein the specific benefit awarding means awards the specific benefit to the player when the special role is won in the specified non-notification situation, regardless of the stop result.

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which a specific benefit is awarded to a player when a special role is won in a specified non-notification situation regardless of the stop result, when a specific role is won in a specified non-notification situation and a specified stop result is displayed, a specified display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that a specific benefit has been awarded, so that the player can recognize that the display of a specified stop result in a specified non-notification situation does not affect the benefit.

Feature B7. A gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, characterized in that the specific benefit is a replay benefit.

Feature B7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above in a configuration in which the replay benefit is awarded as a specific benefit.

Feature B8. The picture display control means enables a specific stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols, in this case, the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) to be displayed based on the stop operation means being operated in a specific stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is stopped first and a "red 7" symbol is aimed on the main line ML, in this case, the predetermined stop mode is a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is stopped first and a "BAR" symbol is aimed on the main line ML) when the special role is won;
This gaming machine is provided with a predetermined notification control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1410 to S1411 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1502 of the presentation side MPU 92 in this case; the special notification control means is a function for executing the processes of steps S1412 to S1413 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1504 of the presentation side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined notification (red 7 notification, in this case, special notification BAR notification) that enables a player to recognize that he should operate the stop operation means in the specific stop mode when the special role is won in a specific notification target situation (the first half situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4, in this case, the predetermined notification target situation is the second half situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4),
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the predetermined non-notification situation is a situation in which the special role is won and the predetermined notification is executed.

According to feature B8, in a configuration in which a predetermined stop result is displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode when a special role is won, and a specific stop result is displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means in a specific stop mode, a special notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode when a special role is won in a predetermined notification target situation, and a predetermined notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode when a special role is won in a specific notification target situation. This makes it possible to vary the type of stop result that prompts the stop display in a situation in which a special role is won. In this case, when the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined stop mode and a predetermined stop result is displayed in a situation in which a predetermined notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that a special role is won in a specific notification target situation and the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode, a predetermined display notification is executed. This makes it possible to enable the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result that was the target of notification has been displayed.

Feature B9. A predetermined profit granting means (a function for executing the process of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) that grants a predetermined profit to a player when a predetermined event occurs, which is either when the special role is won in the predetermined notification target situation or when the predetermined stop result is displayed;
A specific benefit granting means (a function for executing the process of step S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) for granting a specific benefit to a player when a specific event occurs, which is either when the special combination is won in the specific notification target situation or when the specific stop result is displayed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature B8, wherein the predetermined profit is more advantageous to the player than the specific profit.

According to feature B9, when a predetermined stop result corresponding to the award of a relatively highly advantageous predetermined benefit is displayed in a specific notification target situation in which a relatively less advantageous specific benefit may be awarded, a predetermined display notification is executed. This makes it possible to make the player aware that the benefit to be awarded is not the predetermined benefit.

Feature B10. A gaming machine according to feature B8 or B9, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S1806 of the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment) for executing a specific display notification (a third irregular notification sound in the third embodiment) based on the fact that the special role is won in the specified notification target situation and the special notification is executed, but the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop mode to display the specific stop result.

According to feature B10, in a situation where a special notification is being executed to enable a player to recognize that a special role has been won in a specific notification situation and that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode, a specific display notification is executed if the stop operation means is operated in a specific stop mode and a specific stop result is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result that was the subject of the notification has been displayed.

Note that one or more of the features A1 to A9, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, and E1 to E7 may be applied to the features B1 to B10. This allows a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A symbol display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of symbol display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that variably display symbols;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means for setting a game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means (a function for making a positive determination in step S304 in the master MPU 72);
A role selection means (a function for selecting a role in the master MPU 72) for selecting a role when the game is in the execution state;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A symbol display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the symbol display means so that the display of the symbols is started when the game is in the execution state, and the display of the symbols is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning response control means (a function of executing a medium granting process in the main MPU 72 and a response process at the end of a game) for executing a control corresponding to a winning role when a stop result corresponding to a winning role in the lottery process for the winning role is displayed after the changing display of the picture by the control of the picture display control means, as a winning corresponding to the winning role is established;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning combination in the lottery process is as follows:
A first winning combination (index value IV=17 in the second and third embodiments) that allows a first stop result (a combination of “red 7” symbols in the second and third embodiments) to be displayed when the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order;
A second winning combination (index value IV=18 in the second and third embodiments) in which the first stopping result can be displayed when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stopping order, and a second stopping result (a combination of “BAR” patterns in the second and third embodiments) can be displayed when the first stopping result is not displayed;
A gaming machine characterized in that:

According to feature C1, when the first role is won, the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and when the second role is won, the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the second stop result can be displayed when the first stop result is not displayed. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the first stop result can be displayed when the changing display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a situation different from the above-mentioned predetermined situation by using the second role for making the second stop result displayable when the changing display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a predetermined situation. If the probability of the first role is set to a predetermined probability in order to set the probability that the first stop result can be displayed to a predetermined probability, the first role will be won with the predetermined probability even in the above-mentioned predetermined situation. However, since the first stop result can be displayed even when the second role is won as described above, it is possible to set the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined situation to a predetermined probability while setting the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined situation to a lower probability than the predetermined probability. This effect can be achieved by using the second role that allows the second stop result to be displayed. This makes it possible to play the game in an optimal manner.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the picture display control means enables the first stop result to be displayed when the variable display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order when the first role is won or the second role is won and the stop operation means is operated at a first operation timing (a timing aimed at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML), and enables the second stop result to be displayed when the variable display of the pictures in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order when the second role is won and the stop operation means is operated at a second operation timing (a timing aimed at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML).

According to feature C2, when the first role or the second role is won, the first stop result is displayed when the display of the changing patterns in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order and the stop operation means is operated at a first operation timing, and when the second role is won, the second stop result is displayed when the display of the changing patterns in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order and the stop operation means is operated at a second operation timing. As a result, in a configuration in which the first stop result can be displayed when the display of the changing patterns in the multiple picture display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order and the second stop result can be displayed when the first stop result is not displayed when the second role is won, it is possible to make the stop result to be displayed different between the first stop result and the second stop result depending on the operation timing of the stop operation means.

Feature C3. A first notification control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1502 of the performance MPU 92) that stops the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in the predetermined stop order and allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing, regardless of whether the first role is won in the first notification target situation (the first half situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4) or the second role is won in the first notification target situation;
A second notification control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1412 to S1413 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S1504 of the presentation MPU 92) for executing a second notification that stops the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas in the predetermined stopping order and enables the player to recognize that he or she should operate the stop operation means at the second operation timing when the second role is won in the second notification target situation (the latter situation of the pseudo bonus state ST4);
The gaming machine described in feature C2 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to feature C3, in the first notification target situation, the display of the changing patterns in the multiple pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order regardless of whether the first role is won or the second role is won, and a first notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing. This makes it possible to display the first stop result in the first notification target situation, regardless of whether the first role is won or the second role is won. On the other hand, in the second notification target situation, when the second role is won, the display of the changing patterns in the multiple pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and a second notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the second operation timing. This makes it possible to display the second stop result in the second notification target situation, regardless of whether the second role is won.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in Feature C3, wherein the first notification control means executes the first notification when the first role is won in the second notification target situation.

According to feature C4, the first notification is executed not only in the first notification target situation but also in the second notification target situation when the first role is won, so it is possible to make it so that the first stop result is displayed when the first role is won in the first notification target situation. In other words, in the first notification target situation, the probability that the first stop result can be displayed is the sum of the winning probabilities of the first and second roles, whereas in the second notification target situation, the probability that the first stop result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the first role and the probability that the second stop result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the second role.

Feature C5. A gaming machine as described in Features C3 or C4, characterized in that in the first notification situation, the same first benefit (the value of the transition time advantage counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1) is awarded to the player regardless of whether the first role is won and the first stop result is displayed or the second role is won and the first stop result is displayed.

According to feature C5, the same first benefit is awarded to the player in either the case where the first role is won and the first stop result is displayed in the first notification target situation, or the case where the second role is won and the first stop result is displayed, so that it is possible to make the advantage of the first stop result being displayed in the first notification target situation constant in a configuration in which the player performs a stop operation so that the first stop result is displayed in either the case where the first role is won and the second role is won in the first notification target situation.

Feature C6. A gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized in that it is equipped with a first benefit granting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1604 and S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) that grants a first benefit to a player in either the case where the first role is won or the case where the second role is won in the first notification target situation.

According to feature C6, if the first or second winning combination is won in the first notification situation, the first benefit is awarded to the player regardless of the stopping result after the image changes and is displayed, so it is possible to prevent the first benefit from being lost due to the player's mistake in stopping the reels.

Feature C7. A gaming machine as described in feature C5 or C6, characterized in that it is equipped with a second benefit granting means (a function for executing the process of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment) that grants a player a second benefit (the value of the transition time advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 2) when a second target event occurs, which is either winning the second role or displaying the second stop result in the second notification target situation.

According to feature C7, the second benefit is granted to the player when a second target event occurs in the second notification target situation, which is either winning the second role or displaying the second stop result. Therefore, the player will expect the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation.

Feature C8. The gaming machine described in Feature C7, in which the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit.

According to feature C8, since the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit, the player will be more likely to expect the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation than to win the first or second role in the first notification target situation or to have the first stop result displayed in the first notification target situation.

Feature C9. The plurality of picture display areas include a left picture display area (left reel 32L), a center picture display area (center reel 32M), and a right picture display area (right reel 32R);
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that the picture display area that is the first to be targeted for stopping the varying display of the picture in the specified stopping sequence is a specified picture display area (right reel 32R) other than the left side picture display area.

According to feature C9, even if the first role is won, the first stop result will not be displayed unless the changing display of the patterns in the specified pattern display area other than the left pattern display area is stopped first, and even if the second role is won, the first stop result and the second stop result will not be displayed unless the changing display of the patterns in the specified pattern display area other than the left pattern display area is stopped first. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the first stop result and the second stop result will be displayed in a situation where the stopping order of the changing display of the patterns has not been notified.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features C1 to C9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group B and feature group C can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

However, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to ensure that play is carried out smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A display unit (image display device 63 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 63a in the fourth and fifth embodiments),
A display storage means (memory module 101 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) in which image data is stored in advance;
and a display control means (the performance side MPU 92 and the VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) for setting drawing data in a setting storage area (the first frame area 106 a and the second frame area 106 b in the fourth and fifth embodiments) using the image data, and displaying an image on the display unit based on an image signal corresponding to the drawing data outputted to the display means.
The display control means is provided with a predetermined drawing execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2502 to S2505 of VDP103 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2602 to S2606 of VDP103 in the fifth embodiment) that sets predetermined drawing data (image data D1 when divided) that enables predetermined corresponding images (video displays G21, G22 for performance, award number notification display G23) to be displayed in each of a first setting area (first partitioned area DA1 when divided into two) in the setting memory area that corresponds to the first display area (left area A1) in the display unit, and a second setting area (second partitioned area DA2 when divided into two) in the setting memory area that corresponds to the second display area (right area A2) in the display unit.

According to feature D1, predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first and second setting areas in the setting memory area, and a predetermined corresponding image is displayed in each of the first and second display areas on the display unit. As a result, when displaying a predetermined corresponding image in each of the first and second display areas on the display unit, it is only necessary to set the same predetermined drawing data in each of the first and second setting areas using the same image data. This makes it possible to perform display on the display means in an optimal manner.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the predetermined drawing execution means includes copy execution means (a function for executing the process of step S2505 of VDP103 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2606 of VDP103 in the fifth embodiment) that copies the predetermined drawing data to the second setting area.

According to feature D2, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data to the second setting area. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the predetermined drawing data is set for each of the first setting area and the second setting area using image data.

Feature D3. The predetermined drawing execution means includes a means for setting the predetermined drawing data in the first setting area by using the image data (a function for executing the process of step S2504 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature D2, wherein the copy execution means copies the specified drawing data set in the first setting area to the second setting area.

According to feature D3, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area using image data to the second setting area. This makes it possible to set the predetermined drawing data in the second setting process using the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area.

Feature D4: The predetermined drawing execution means includes a means for setting the predetermined drawing data in a memory area (development buffer 105) different from the setting memory area by using the image data (a function for executing the process of step S2604 of VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature D2, wherein the copy execution means copies the specified drawing data set in the different memory areas to each of the first setting area and the second setting area.

According to feature D4, the specified drawing data is set in a memory area different from the setting memory area using image data, and the set specified drawing data is copied to each of the first setting area and the second setting area. This makes it possible to create the specified drawing data to be copied to the first setting area and the second setting area without performing a drawing process in the setting memory area.

Feature D5. The display control means, in addition to displaying the predetermined corresponding image in each of the first display area and the second display area, sets in the setting memory area different corresponding drawing data (image data D2 corresponding to the remaining number of games to be continued image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the number of acquisitions display image G32, image data D4 corresponding to the remaining number of awards display image G33, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34, and image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35) that enables different corresponding images (remaining number of games to be continued image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the number of acquisitions display image G32, image data D4 corresponding to the remaining number of awards display image G33, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34, and image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35) that are not images displayed with the same content in each of the first display area and the second display area. A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that it is equipped with a different corresponding setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2506 to S2513 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment).

Feature D5 makes it possible to display a corresponding image in each of the first and second display areas while displaying a different corresponding image that is not an image with the same content in each of the first and second display areas.

Feature D6. The gaming machine described in Feature D5, wherein the different correspondence setting means sets the different correspondence drawing data in a setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area so that the different correspondence image is displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area.

According to feature D6, the different corresponding image is displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area, so that while the first display area and the second display area are partitioned, it is possible to perform display that is not limited by the partitions.

Feature D7. The gaming machine described in Feature D6, characterized in that the different correspondence setting means sets the different correspondence drawing data in a setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area after the predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first setting area and the second setting area.

According to feature D7, after the predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first and second setting areas, different corresponding drawing data is set in the setting area including the first and second setting areas, so that the different corresponding image is displayed in front of the predetermined corresponding image displayed in each section of the first and second display areas, without being restricted by the sections of the first and second display areas. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to each of the predetermined corresponding images displayed in each of the first and second display areas, and the different corresponding image displayed without being restricted by the sections of the first and second display areas.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D7, characterized in that the display control means includes a means for setting specific drawing data in a setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area, which enables a specific corresponding image to be displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area (a function for causing the display shown in Figures 27(a) to 27(c) in VDP103 to be performed).

Feature D8 also makes it possible to create a display period in which a specific corresponding image is displayed when the first and second display areas are not partitioned.

Note that any one or more of features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features D1 to D8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A display unit (image display device 63 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 63a in the fourth and fifth embodiments),
A display control means (the performance side MPU 92 and the VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) for displaying an image on the display unit;
Equipped with
The display control means is a section-corresponding control means (a function for executing display control processing for the top-up period of the presentation side MPU 92 in the fourth and fifth embodiments and a function for executing drawing processing of the divided images of the VDP 103) that controls the display means so that the display unit is divided into a plurality of display areas (a left area A1 and a right area A2 when divided into two, an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13 and a lower right area A14 when divided into four), and a section-side image (an animation display G21, G22 for presentation and a number of awards notification display G23 when divided into two, an animation display G41, G42 for presentation and a number of awards notification display G43 when divided into four) is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, and a different corresponding image (a remaining number of continued games image G31, a number of acquisitions display image G32, a remaining number of awards display image G33, a stop order notification image G34 and an operation notification image G35) that is not an image displayed with the same content is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

According to feature E1, when a partition side image is displayed in each of a plurality of display areas partitioned in the display unit, a different corresponding image, which is not an image displayed with the same content, is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas. This makes it possible to provide display content different from the partition side image by using a different corresponding image displayed independently of the plurality of display areas, while drawing attention to the partition side image displayed in each of the plurality of display areas. This makes it possible to ensure that the display on the display means is performed optimally.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the different corresponding image is displayed as if it exists in front of the multiple display areas.

According to feature E2, in a configuration in which a separate corresponding image is displayed while a partition side image is displayed in each of a plurality of display areas, the separate corresponding image is displayed as if it is in front of the plurality of display areas, making it possible to make the separate corresponding image stand out.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that the different corresponding image is displayed across multiple display areas so as to straddle the boundaries between the multiple display areas.

According to feature E3, the partition side images are displayed within the range of their respective display areas, while the separate corresponding images are displayed across the boundaries of the multiple display areas. This makes it possible to display the separate corresponding images at a size larger than the partition side images.

Feature E4. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the separate corresponding image is an image for notifying the player of a predetermined content.

According to feature E4, the separate corresponding images for notifying the player of the specified content are displayed independently without being restricted to multiple display areas, making it possible to optimally notify the player of the specified content.

Feature E5. The display control means is provided with a means for displaying an after-operation image (G23 for the number of awards when split into two, G43 for the number of awards when split into four) on the display unit based on the operation of the operation means (operation device for performance 121) during the operation valid period (a function for displaying the image shown in FIG. 43(c) or FIG. 44(c) in VDP 103);
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the different corresponding image is an image that enables a player to recognize that he or she should operate the operating means during the valid operation period.

According to feature E5, the different corresponding image that allows the player to recognize that the operation means should be operated during the valid operation period is displayed independently without being limited to multiple display areas, so that it is possible to preferably notify the player that the operation means should be operated during the valid operation period.

Feature E6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E5, characterized in that the number of display areas displayed as the multiple display areas differs between the first display state (when divided into two) and the second display state (when divided into four).

According to feature E6, the number of display areas displayed as multiple display areas differs between the first display status and the second display status, making it possible to diversify the display content when displaying partition side images using multiple display areas.

Feature E7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E6, characterized in that the partition side images in each of the plurality of display areas are displayed using the same image data.

According to feature E7, the partition side images in each of the multiple display areas are displayed using the same image data, making it possible to display the partition side images while reducing the processing load.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, and features E1 to E7 may be applied to the features E1 to E7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group D and feature group E can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines are equipped with a storage section for storing gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or a process is executed to increase the number of gaming balls available to the player.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals has been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Also, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the rotation of the reels has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the display on the display means needs to be performed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine that starts the rotation of a rotating body based on the operation of a start operation means, stops the rotation of the rotating body based on the operation of a stop operation means, and awards a bonus to the player based on the image that appears after the rotation has stopped.

10... slot machine, 31... reel unit, 32L... left reel, 32M... center reel, 32R... right reel, 41... start lever, 42-44... stop buttons, 63... image display device, 63a... liquid crystal display unit, 72... main MPU, 74... main RAM, 74e... AT continuation counter, 92... performance MPU, 101... memory module, 103... VDP, 105... expansion buffer, 106a... first frame area, 106b... second frame area, 121... performance operation device, A1... left side area, A2...right side area, A11...upper left area, A12...upper right area, A13...lower left area, A14...lower right area, D1...image data at the time of division, D2-D5...image data, DA1...first partitioned area, DA2...second partitioned area, G21, G22...video display for effects, G23...award number notification display, G31...remaining number of games to continue image, G32...acquisition number display image, G33...remaining number of awards display image, G34...stop order notification image, G35...operation notification image, G41, G42...video display for effects, G43...award number notification display.

Claims (1)

A display means having a display unit;
A display storage means for storing image data in advance;
a display control means for setting drawing data in a setting storage area using the image data, and displaying an image on the display unit based on an image signal corresponding to the drawing data outputted to the display means;
Equipped with
The display control means
a predetermined drawing execution means for setting predetermined drawing data that enables a predetermined corresponding image to be displayed in a first setting area in the setting storage area that corresponds to a first display area on the display unit, and in a second setting area in the setting storage area that corresponds to a second display area on the display unit ;
a different correspondence setting means for setting, in the setting storage area, different drawing data that enables a different image to be displayed in a display area including the first display area and the second display area in addition to displaying the predetermined corresponding image in each of the first display area and the second display area;
Equipped with
the predetermined drawing execution means includes means for creating the predetermined drawing data in a predetermined setting area in the setting storage area, the predetermined setting area being an area not corresponding to a display area of the display unit, and copying the predetermined drawing data created in the predetermined setting area to each of the first setting area and the second setting area;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the different corresponding setting means sets the different drawing data in the setting memory area after the specified drawing execution means copies the specified drawing data to each of the first setting area and the second setting area .

Images